JP6791592B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

By the way, a game machine including a projector that projects video light toward the front has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the image light projected from the projector is reflected to the back side of the game machine main body, and the reflected image light is projected onto the first projected member and the second covered member. It is equipped with a projection member. Then, the image light representing the two-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface of the first projected member, and the image light representing the three-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface of the second projected member. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that gives a three-dimensional effect and depth to the image.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-187444

However, in recent years, by effectively exerting the function peculiar to the game machine that the image is projected by the image light projected from the projector, the effect of the image visual effect is higher than before, and the player can perform more. It is required to enhance the interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the interest by appropriately performing an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the game proceeds according to the result of the lottery. A projection means capable of projecting a predetermined image light (for example, a projector 213) and an image light control means capable of controlling an image projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, a sub-control board 72). ), The first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and the second projection area (for example, for example) as the projection area in which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has a movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having at least a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a fixed projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A fixed projected member (eg, lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708), a movable projected member driving means capable of operating the movable projected member (eg, drive mechanism 815, large diameter gear 742, and The image light control means can project a first image light according to the result of the lottery and a second image light irrelevant to the result of the lottery, including a gear shape portion 744). Yes, the image projected by the first image light (for example, an effect image) is projected on at least the projection area of the movable projected member, and the image projected by the second image light (for example, for example). The information image) is characterized in that it is configured to be projected onto at least a projection region of the fixed projection member.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the image projected by the first image light according to the result of the lottery is projected at least in the projection area of the movable projected member, and has nothing to do with the result of the lottery. Since the image projected by the two image lights is projected at least in the projection area of the fixed projected member, the image projected by the second image light is projected onto the projection area of the fixed projected member while being projected. The image projected by the first image light can be projected onto the projection area of the movable projected member, and it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a high image visual effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the display device in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the projection block in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical sectional view of the projection block in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected member moving mechanism in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block when the trapezoidal member is the projection target of the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state of the projected block when the pseudo reel member is projected | projected the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block when the pseudo reel member is a projection target of image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state of the projected block when the flat screen member is projected | projected the image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block when a flat screen member is a projection target of image light in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the effect registration task executed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the method of creating the image data (PJ correspondence image data) of the image light projected on various projected members in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the PJ-corresponding image data generation method by the virtual projection photography method in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the virtual projection image data generated by the virtual projection operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the outline of the process at the time of generating the PJ correspondence image data from the virtual photograph image data in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the generation of PJ-corresponding image data in the case where the projected member to be projected includes a movable projected member in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the image data generation processing executed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the PJ-corresponding image data generation method in the modification 1 of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the PJ-corresponding image data generation method in the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the projection matrix and the offset matrix used in the generation processing of the PJ correspondence image data in the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the PJ correspondence image data generation method by the texture mapping method in the modification 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the image data generation processing executed in the modification 3 of this invention. It is external perspective view of the display device which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the projected block. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block shown in FIG. 32. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block shown in FIG. 32. It is an exploded perspective view of the projected block shown in FIG. 32. It is an external perspective view of a movable screen unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable screen unit into a pillar screen, a right base, a left base, and a rotary gear mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a pillar screen. It is an exploded perspective view of a pillar screen. It is a perspective view of the pillar screen seen from the direction which can visually recognize the mode in which a male rib is sandwiched between female ribs. It is a side view which looked at the pillar screen from the right side. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 1st screen member and the 2nd screen member. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional perspective view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 41. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 1st screen member and the 3rd screen member. It is an exploded perspective view of the right screen drive base and the drive mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side. It is sectional drawing seen from above when the projected block was cut in the horizontal direction so as to include a rotation axis. It is a perspective view which looked at the right side surface of the projected block from the front side. It is a figure which shows the state which the rotation of a movable screen unit is not blocked by a stopper mechanism. It is a figure which shows the state which the rotation of a movable screen unit is blocked by a stopper mechanism. It is an enlarged view of the part A shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side, and is the figure which showed the optical sensor unit so that it could be visually recognized. It is the figure which arranged the front view and the right side view of the projected block side by side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and the right side view of the projected block side by side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and the right side view of the projected block side by side, and is the figure when the projection plane of the 2nd screen member faces the front. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an image projected on the projection surface of the second screen member, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image projected on the projection surface of the third screen member. It is a front view of the front panel of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the front panel from the upper right side. It is a front view of the front production unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the front effect unit. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 57. It is an exploded perspective view of the right light effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the right light effect unit. It is a front view of the right side light production unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED substrate. It is an exploded perspective view of an LED substrate, a light guide plate cover, and a light guide plate. FIG. 6 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the LED substrate and the right light guide plate subunit are assembled. It is a perspective view of the right side light effect unit seen from the arrow view 990 direction of FIG. It is a front view of the left side light production unit. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED substrate. It is a figure which shows the mode of the right-hand light effect unit when neither the right-hand light guide plate subunit nor the right-side lens subunit is performing a light emission effect. It is a figure which shows the mode of the right-hand light effect unit when the light-emitting effect is performed on the right light guide plate subunit, and the light-emitting effect is not performed on the right lens subunit. It is a figure which shows the mode of the right-hand light effect unit when the light-emitting effect is not performed on the right-hand light guide plate subunit, and the light-emitting effect is performed on the right lens subunit.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having a bonus operation function and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number values and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. In addition, the reel stop control means uses a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various effects are produced by displaying an image by a display device, outputting light by various lamps, outputting sound by a speaker, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for production is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2 (game machine main body). The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b to which an opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are provided side by side in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (rotation direction of the reel).

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a lumbar panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1.

The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged to face the display device 11 which will be described later and is arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, by forming the display device cover 30 with a black translucent synthetic resin, the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a is suppressed, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper part of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see LED group 85 in FIG. 15 described later), and lights are turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in the LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the lumbar panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has a symbol display area 4, various devices (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, 3 stop buttons 17L, 17C, which are to be operated by the player. 17R, settlement button (not shown), etc.) are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position on the player side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. It has a size that makes 3L, 3C, and 3R visible. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is arranged continuously among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is set in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the design is displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). Then, in the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is formed. It is defined as an effective line for judging whether or not a prize is won.

The reel display window 4 is formed by the opening of the frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, a pedestal region having a substantially horizontal plane is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, the medal insertion slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used in one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the cabinet 2a. Inside the MAX bet button 15a, a bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided. In addition, the checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1-bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are all referred to as "insertion operations".

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal region on the substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as "the number of medals to be paid out") as a privilege. For digitally displaying (notifying) information such as (hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is switched from the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out to the display mode of the error type information.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a 2-digit 7-segment LED. Then, the instruction monitor notifies the player of the necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking, or turning off the two-digit 7-segment LED in a manner uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information to be notified. To do.

The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, when the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)" is notified. When the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order "2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)" is displayed, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order is displayed. When notifying "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

As shown in FIG. 15 described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly performed. It is controlled by the main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another means controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the information of the stop operation. Specifically, the stop operation is performed by the display device 11 described later, which is composed of the projection block 201 including the projector 213 described later and the projected block 202 including various projected members (see FIGS. 3 and 5 to 8 described later). Information of.

When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said that the notification is direct). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value "1" that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like) display the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified to the user.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Further, the presence / absence of notification of such stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, in a general game state in which navigation does not occur (for example, a non-ART game state), information on the stop operation is not notified, but in a notification game state in which navigation occurs (for example, an ART game state), information on the stop operation is notified. You may do so.

Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially perpendicular to the pedestal region of the pedestal portion 13 in the substantially horizontal plane of the front portion of the door body 9. The sub-display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 15 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Has. The sub-display device 18 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

A medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided in the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 51, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the production are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the front door 2b on the back surface side.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. A display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 has a projection block 201 including the projector 213 described later, and a projected block 202 including a plurality of types of projected members described later on which the image light emitted from the projector 213 described later is projected. Further, in the projected block 202, a function for switching the projected member (projected member moving mechanism 305 described later) is also provided according to the game state.

In the display device 11, the image light corresponding to the image data (PJ-compatible image data described later) generated by the image composition process in the virtual space described later is projected onto the predetermined projected member, and the image display effect or the like is performed. It is said. Specifically, the display device 11 generates video light based on the shape of the projected member (object) to be projected and the positional relationship (projection distance, angle, etc.) between the projector 213 and the projected member, which will be described later. Then, the image light is projected onto the surface of the projected member from the projector 213 described later. By providing such an effect function, it is possible to perform an advanced and powerful effect. The specific configuration and operation of the display device 11 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

A medal payout device 51 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. Further, the medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 15 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) is arranged. A sub-control circuit 150 (see FIG. 18 described later) described later is mounted on the sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57. The sub-control circuit 150 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The sub-control board 72 shows a specific example of the control unit according to the present invention. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 150 will be described later.

The sub-relay board 61 is arranged above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71, which will be described later, is mounted. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub-control board 72 and various device units (units) is mounted.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 15 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 15 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which the wiring for connecting the above is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the front door 2b on the back surface side, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is on the side opposite to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41. A main control board case 55 in which the board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 16 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. .. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the main control circuit 90 also controls lottery processing for determining whether or not a notification game (ART or the like) is determined, display processing for navigation information on an instruction monitor, transmission processing for various test signals, and the like. .. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of medals are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (game medium detecting means: not shown) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b, which is a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 and below the reel display window 4 (FIG. 4 described later). 15). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and the like. This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting each of the second interface boards 402 for a testing machine is mounted. Examples of various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 15a, a 1-bet button 15b, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Display device configuration>
Next, the configuration of the display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display device 11 includes a projection block 201 and a projected block 202 arranged below the projection block 201. The display device 11 generates image light by a projector 213 installed in the projection block 201, which will be described later, and emits the image light to the projection surface of a projected member (trapezoidal member 302, etc., which will be described later) provided in the projected block 202. Project to.

In this specification, expressions such as "image projected (or projected) from the projector 213", "projected image", "projected image", and "projected image" may be used. However, these all mean that the images are projected (or projected) on the projection surface by the image light projected from the projector 213.

[Projection block]
Next, the configuration of the projection block 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 201. FIG. 7 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projection block 201. The projection block 201 including the projector 213 described later shows a specific example of the projection unit according to the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 6, the projection block 201 includes a base member 211, a reflection member 212, and a projector 213. The base member 211 is composed of a hollow substantially box-shaped member having an open lower surface, and includes an upper plate portion 221 and a front plate portion 222, a rear plate portion 223, a left plate portion 224, and a right plate portion 225. Have.

A projector 213 is attached to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 (the surface on the projected block 202 side). Further, the front plate portion 222 is provided with a reflective member mounting portion 227, and the reflective member mounting portion 227 is composed of a protruding member protruding forward (on the player side) from the front plate portion 222.

The front piece 234 of the reflective member mounting portion 227 is composed of a plate-shaped member, and the surface direction of the front surface piece 234 (the protruding surface of the reflective member mounting portion 227) is obliquely upward and the surface direction of the back surface is obliquely downward. It is tilted so that it becomes. A reflective member 212 is attached to the back surface of the front piece 234 (the surface on the side of the projector 213 and the projected block 202).

As shown in FIG. 7, the reflective member 212 is fixed to the mirror holder 236 and the mirror holder 236, which are made of a plate-shaped member having substantially the same size (size) as the front piece 234 and having a rectangular surface. It has a reflection mirror 237 and the like. The mirror holder 236 is fixed to the back surface of the front piece 234 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

The reflection mirror 237 is fixed to the surface of the mirror holder 236 on the projector 213 side and the projected block 202 side. The reflection mirror 237 is tilted so that the surface direction of the reflection surface is obliquely downward, and the image light emitted from the projector 213 is directed toward a projected member (trapezoidal member 302 or the like described later) of the projected block 202. reflect.

As shown in FIG. 7, the projector 213 has a projector main body 241 and a mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and the projector main body 241 is mounted on the back surface (the surface on the projected block 202 side) of the mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is fixed to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 of the base member 211 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

The projector main body 241 has a case 251 (see FIG. 6), a lighting unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a plurality of heat sinks 255, and a plurality of fans 256. Note that FIG. 7 shows only one heat sink 255 and one fan 256.

The case 251 is composed of a hollow housing. A lighting unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a heat sink 255, and a fan 256 are housed inside the case 251. Further, an opening closed by the projection lens 254 is provided on the front surface (reflection member 212 side) of the case 251.

Inside the case 251 the liquid crystal prism unit 253 is arranged behind the projection lens 254 (in the direction opposite to the mirror holder 236 side), and the lighting unit 252 is arranged behind the liquid crystal prism unit 253. A plurality of heat sinks 255 are arranged around the lighting unit 252, and the plurality of fans 256 are arranged adjacent to the plurality of heat sinks 255.

The lighting unit 252 has, for example, a plurality of light sources. The plurality of light sources are composed of a light source R (not shown) that emits red light, a light source G (not shown) that emits green light, and a light source B (not shown) that emits blue light. .. Therefore, light of three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is incident on the liquid crystal prism unit 253, respectively.

The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, one high-intensity discharge lamp may be used as the light source. In this case, a color separation mirror (dichroic mirror) is used to separate the light emitted from the high-intensity discharge lamp into three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B).

The liquid crystal prism unit 253 has, for example, three liquid crystal panels and a cross prism (dichroic prism) for color synthesis. The three liquid crystal panels include a liquid crystal panel R (not shown) in which red light is incident, a liquid crystal panel G (not shown) in which green light is incident, and a liquid crystal panel B (not shown) in which blue light is incident. Consists of. The cross prism synthesizes three video lights generated by each liquid crystal panel as one video light.

The projection lens 254 is arranged so as to face the reflection mirror 237 of the reflection member 212. Therefore, the image light emitted from the liquid crystal prism unit 253 passes through the projection lens 254 and is incident on the reflection mirror 237. The plurality of heat sinks 255 dissipate heat generated by the lighting unit 252. Further, the plurality of fans 256 has a plurality of heat sinks 2.
Air is blown to 55 to cool the plurality of heat sinks 255.

[Projected block]
Next, the configuration of the projected block 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the projected block 202. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism of the projected member provided on the projected block 202.

As shown in FIG. 8, the projected block 202 includes a storage case 301, a trapezoidal member 302, a pseudo reel member 303, a flat screen member 304, and a projected member moving mechanism 305. Each of the trapezoidal member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304 shows a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention. Further, the trapezoidal member 302 shows a specific example of the first display unit according to the present invention, and each of the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 is one of the second display units according to the present invention. A concrete example is shown. Further, the projected member moving mechanism 305 shows a specific example of the movable control means according to the present invention.

(1) Storage Case The storage case 301 is a hollow housing having an open front surface and an upper surface, and has a pedestal portion 311 and a back wall 312, a left side wall 313, and a right side wall 314. Each wall is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, the pedestal portion 311 and the back surface wall 312 form the bottom portion and the back surface portion of the storage case 301, respectively, and the left side wall 313 and the right side wall 314 respectively. The left side surface portion and the right side surface portion of the storage case 301 are formed.

(2) Trapezoidal member The trapezoidal member 302 is composed of a floor plate portion 321 having a trapezoidal surface and three wall plate portions 322, 323, 324, and has a fixing member such as a screw on the pedestal portion 311 of the storage case 301. It is fixed.

The floor plate portion 321 is mounted on the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311. At this time, the floor plate portion 321 is placed on the pedestal portion 311 so that the lower side (long side) portion of the floor plate portion 321 is located on the front surface (player side). The surface 321a (flat surface) opposite to the surface of the floor plate portion 321 that is in contact with the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311 is a projection surface. The image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321.

The wall plate portion 322 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321. At this time, the wall plate portion 322 is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 322 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 322 on the front door 2b side (player side) becomes the projection surface 322a. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322.

The wall plate portion 323 is composed of a plate-shaped member, and is continuously formed on the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 323 is continuous with the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 323 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Is formed. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 323 on the wall plate portion 324 side becomes the projection surface 323a. Since the angle between the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle larger than 90 degrees), the projection surface 323a has an opening 10a of the front door 2b. It becomes visible to the player through. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323.

The wall plate portion 324 is composed of a plate-shaped member, and is continuously formed on the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 324 is continuous with the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 324 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Is formed. Then, the plane of the wall plate portion 324 on the wall plate portion 323 side becomes the projection surface 324a. Since the angle between the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle larger than 90 degrees), the projection surface 324a has an opening 10a of the front door 2b. It becomes visible to the player through. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324 is projected with the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflection member 212.

In the present embodiment, the image light is projected onto a part of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the trapezoidal member 302. The projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a have a projection region on which the video light is projected and a non-projection region on which the video light is not projected. A silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection regions of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a. On the other hand, a black paint is applied to the non-projection regions of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a.

In this way, by applying the black paint to the non-projection regions of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a, it is possible to suppress the reflection of light in the non-projection region and suppress the diffuse reflection of light in the cabinet 2a. can do. Further, by applying the black paint to the non-projected area, vibration, rotation, collapse, shape change, coloring change, partial emphasis expression, etc. of the projected member become possible.

(3) Pseudo-reel member As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the pseudo-reel member 303 includes an arc plate portion 331 and a pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B (for the rotating arm 332B, see FIG. 11 described later). To be equipped with.

The arc plate portion 331 is composed of a plate body extending in an arc shape (a plate body having an arc shape extending on the side surface). Therefore, an inner peripheral surface 331a and an outer peripheral surface 331b are formed on the arc plate portion 331. The inner peripheral surface 331a of the arc plate portion 331 is provided with decorations related to the model of the pachislot machine 1. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface 331b is formed of a smooth curved surface, and serves as a projection surface on which the image light emitted from the projector 213 is projected (see FIG. 11 described later). Further, silver (or gray) paint is applied to the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b of the arc plate portion 331.

The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are continuously formed on the pair of arcuate side surface portions of the arcuate plate portion 331, and the surface thereof is formed of a substantially fan-shaped plate body. The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are rotatably supported by the support plates 351A and 351B described later of the projected member moving mechanism 305, respectively. The pseudo reel member 303 rotates between a standby position in which the inner peripheral surface 331a faces forward (player side) and an exposed position in which the outer peripheral surface 331b faces forward. The operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 described later.

(4) Flat screen member As shown in FIG. 8, the flat screen member 304 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and has a first flat surface 304a (lower surface in FIG. 8) and a second flat surface 304b (FIG. 8). 8 has an upper surface). A silver (or gray) paint is applied to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304. On the other hand, a white paint is applied to the second plane 304b, and the second plane 304b becomes a projection surface of image light projected from the projector 213 via the reflection member 212.

The flat screen member 304 rotates between a standby position in which the plane direction of the first plane 304a is obliquely downward and an exposed position in which the plane direction of the second plane (projective plane) 304b is forward (player side). To do. Then, when the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the exposed position, the image light is projected on the second flat surface (projection plane) 304b.

The flat screen member 304 is supported by a pair of crank arms 378A and 378B described later of the projected member moving mechanism 305, and the rotation of the pair of crank arms 378A and 378B causes the flat screen member 304 to rotate. The crank arms 378A and 378B are rotatably supported by the support plates 351A and 351B, respectively.

(5) Projected member moving mechanism As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the projected member moving mechanism 305 includes support plates 351A and 351B, a pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352, and a flat screen member moving mechanism 353. ..

Both the support plates 351A and 351B are formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like member having a vertically long surface.
The support plates 351A and 351B are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction (long side direction of the pseudo reel member 303) with an appropriate distance (a distance larger than the width of the trapezoidal member 302). Further, the support plates 351A and 351B are fixed to the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal portion 311 of the storage case 301 by using a fixing member such as a screw. A pseudo reel member 303 is arranged between the support plate 351A and the support plate 351B.

Further, the support plates 351A and 351B rotatably support the rotating arms 332A and 332B of the pseudo reel member 303, respectively. The support plates 351A and 351B have through holes through which the shaft 374 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353, which will be described later, penetrates, and through holes through which the rotating shafts 335 of the rotating arms 332A and 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 penetrate. It is provided.

Further, the support plate 351B is provided with a stopper 355, a first sensor 356, and a second sensor 357. The stopper 355 is a member for limiting the rotation range of the drive gear 362 described later of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352. The first sensor 356 detects the crank arm 378B described later of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the standby position. The second sensor 357 detects the crank arm 378B described later of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the exposed position.

The pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 has a drive motor 361 and a drive gear 362. The drive motor 361 is fixed to the motor fixing portion 314b of the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 by using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 361 is attached to the right side wall 314 so that the rotation shaft (not shown) of the drive motor 361 meshes with the drive gear 362.

The drive gear 362 is composed of a gear member having a substantially semicircular surface, and is rotatably supported by a support plate 351B. The drive gear 362 is arranged on the surface of the support plate 351B facing the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. Further, a rotation shaft 335 of the rotation arm 332B (see FIG. 11 described later) of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the central portion of the drive gear 362.

The flat screen member moving mechanism 353 includes a drive motor 371, intermediate gears 372 and 373, a shaft 374, crank gears 375 and 376, and crank arms 378A and 378B. The drive motor 371 is fixed to the support plate 351B by using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 371 is attached to the support plate 351B so that the rotating shaft 371a of the drive motor 371 meshes with the intermediate gear 372.

The intermediate gear 372 is arranged between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. One end of the shaft 374 protruding through the through hole 314a (see FIG. 8) provided in the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 is connected to the central portion of the intermediate gear 372.

The intermediate gear 373 is arranged between the support plate 351A and the left wall 313 of the storage case 301. The other end of the shaft 374 that protrudes through the through hole 313a (see FIG. 8) provided in the left wall 313 of the storage case 301 is connected to the central portion of the intermediate gear 373.

The shaft 374 is provided so as to penetrate the support plates 351A and 351B, and rotatably supports the support plates 351A and 351B. Since the intermediate gear 373 is connected to the intermediate gear 372 via the shaft 374 as described above, the intermediate gear 373 rotates together with the intermediate gear 372.

The crank gear 375 is arranged between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the right side wall 314. At this time, the crank gear 375 is arranged so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 372. Further, a crank pin 375a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 372 facing the support plate 351B.

The crank gear 376 is arranged between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the left side wall 313. At this time, the crank gear 376 is arranged so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 373. Further, a crank pin 376a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 373 facing the support plate 351A.

The crank arm 378A is arranged between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351A. The crank arm 378A has an arm portion 381 formed of a plate-shaped member extending in a substantially L shape, and a connecting portion 382 provided at one end of the arm portion 381.

The arm portion 381 is provided with a rotation shaft 384 that rotatably engages with the support plate 351A and an engagement groove 385 that extends linearly. The engagement groove 385 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 381 facing the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. The crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 385.

The connecting portion 382 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 382 is continuous with the arm portion 381, and the other surface (flat surface) is in contact with the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 382 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

The crank arm 378B is arranged between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The crank arm 378B has an arm portion 391 formed of a plate-shaped member extending in a substantially L shape, and a connecting portion 392 provided at one end of the arm portion 391.

The arm portion 391 includes a rotating shaft (not shown) that rotatably engages with the support plate 351A, an engaging groove 395 extending linearly, a first detection piece 396, and a second detection piece 397. Is provided. The engagement groove 395 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 391 facing the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. The crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 395.

The first detection piece 396 is provided at a position between the connection portion 392 and the engagement groove 395, and projects outward from the side portion of one of the arm portions 391 (the back surface side in FIG. 9). When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the standby position, the first detection piece 396 is detected by the first sensor 356 provided on the support plate 351B.

The second detection piece 397 is provided below the first detection piece 396, and projects outward from one side of the arm portion 391. When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, the second detection piece 397 is detected by the second sensor 357 provided on the support plate 351B.

The connecting portion 392 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 392 is continuous with the arm portion 391, and the other surface (flat surface) is in contact with the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 392 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 by using a fixing member such as a screw.

[When using trapezoidal members]
Next, a state when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of video light will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of video light. Note that FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the projected block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is the projection target of the image light.

In a state where the trapezoidal member 302 is a target for projecting video light, the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 are arranged at their respective standby positions as shown in FIG.

When the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged in the standby position, the pseudo reel member 303 is located behind the trapezoidal member 302, and the inner peripheral surface 331a of the arc plate portion 331 faces forward. At this time, one radial portion (one radial side portion) of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355 (see FIG. 9). Therefore, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side), the rotation of the drive gear 362 clockwise (clockwise) is locked by the stopper 355.

Further, when the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the standby position, the flat screen member 304 is located above the trapezoidal member 302, and the first flat surface 304a faces downward. At this time, the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 provided on the crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353. As a result, the sub-control circuit 150 detects that the flat screen member 304 is arranged in the standby position.

The pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 (projected member) arranged at the standby position do not intervene between the trapezoidal member 302 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, the trapezoidal member 302 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and is the target of projection of the image light.

Image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a (see FIG. 8 for the projection surface 324a) of the trapezoidal member 302 to be projected. Will be done. As a result, the image used for the production is displayed on each projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 to be projected, and can be visually recognized by the player.

In the present embodiment, image light is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the floor plate portion 321 of the trapezoidal member 302 and the three wall plate portions 322, 323, 324 (see FIG. 8 for the wall plate portion 324). , Display the image used for the production. As a result, it is possible to perform a novel effect that gives a three-dimensional effect and depth to the image with a simple configuration without increasing the cost. As a result, the player's interest in the video display effect can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the trapezoidal member 302 applied as the projected member has four projection planes that intersect the optical axis of the projected image light at different angles. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the projected member according to the present invention, for example, a projected member having two or three projection planes intersecting the optical axis of the image light at different angles is used. Alternatively, a projected member having five or more projection planes intersecting the optical axis of the image light at different angles may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration example in which the trapezoidal member 302 is fixed at a predetermined position is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the trapezoidal member according to the present invention, for example, a trapezoidal member that can move between a standby position where the image light emitted from the projector is not projected and an exposed position where the image light emitted from the projector is projected may be used. Good. Further, in this case, the movement mode of the trapezoidal member may be, for example, a mode of rotating around an appropriate axis or a mode of linear movement.

[Operation of pseudo reel member]
Next, the operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state of the projected block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of video light. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of video light.

When the pseudo reel member 303 is targeted for projection of video light, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the standby position (state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (state shown in FIGS. 11 and 12). At this time, the flat screen member 304 is maintained in a state of being arranged in the standby position.

In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 to the exposed position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side) on the drawing, and the drive gear 362 is used. Is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) (see the thick arrow in FIG. 11).

Since the rotation shaft 335 provided on the rotation arm 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the drive gear 362, when the drive gear 362 is rotated counterclockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 moves to the left from the standby position. Rotate around. Then, when the other radial portion of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355, the counterclockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the exposed position.

When the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the exposed position, the front surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is covered by the pseudo reel member 303. Further, at this time, the flat screen member 304 arranged at the standby position does not intervene between the pseudo reel member 303 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, the pseudo reel member 303 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and is the target of projection of the image light.

The image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the outer peripheral surface 331b (hereinafter, referred to as “projection surface 331b”) of the pseudo reel member 303 that is the projection target. As a result, the image used for the production is displayed on the pseudo reel member 303, which is the projection target, and can be visually recognized by the player.

In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 from the exposed position to the standby position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, and the drive gear 362 is used. Rotate clockwise (clockwise).

When the drive gear 362 rotates clockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 rotates clockwise from the exposed position. Then, when one of the radial portions of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355 (state in FIG. 9), the clockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the standby position.

In the present embodiment, the image light representing the reel is projected on the curved projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the reel is physically present in the cabinet 2a facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (front door 2b). As a result, it is possible to perform a novel effect that gives a three-dimensional effect and depth to the image with a simple configuration without increasing the cost, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of displaying the image.

[Operation of flat screen member]
Next, the operation of the flat screen member 304 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state of the projected block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of video light. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projected block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of video light.

When the flat screen member 304 is to be projected with image light, the flat screen member 304 is moved from the standby position (state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (state shown in FIGS. 13 and 14). At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 is maintained in a state of being arranged in the standby position.

To move the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, drive the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353, and see the projected block 202 from the right side (right side wall 314 side) on the drawing, and the intermediate gear 372. Rotates clockwise (clockwise) (see the thick arrow in FIG. 13).

One end of the shaft 374 is connected to the intermediate gear 372, and the intermediate gear 373 (see FIG. 9) is connected to the other end of the shaft 374. Therefore, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, when the intermediate gear 372 rotates clockwise, the intermediate gear 373 also rotates clockwise.

When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate clockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing. Further, the crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is engaged with the engaging groove 395 of the crank arm 378B, and the crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is engaged with the engaging groove 385 of the crank arm 378A.

Therefore, when the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise), respectively. As a result, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, the flat screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates counterclockwise from the standby position.

Then, when the second sensor 357 detects the second detection piece 397 of the crank arm 378B, the drive of the drive motor 371 is stopped and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the exposed position.

When the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the exposed position, the front surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is covered by the flat screen member 304. Further, at this time, the pseudo reel member 303 arranged at the standby position does not intervene between the flat screen member 304 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, the flat screen member 304 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side, and is a projection target.

The image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 that is the projection target. As a result, the image used for the production is displayed on the flat screen member 304 which is the projection target, and can be visually recognized by the player. For example, by projecting an image light representing a two-dimensional image on a projection surface 304b which is a plane of a flat screen member 304, the image is displayed on a display device using a flat panel such as a liquid crystal display device. The image can be shown to the player.

In order to move the flat screen member 304 from the exposed position to the standby position, the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, and the intermediate gear 372 Rotate the 373 counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate counterclockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate clockwise when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing. Then, when the crank gears 375 and 376 rotate clockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B to rotate clockwise, respectively. As a result, when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side on the drawing, the flat screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates clockwise from the exposed position.

After that, when the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 of the crank arm 378B, the drive of the drive motor 371 is stopped and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 is stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the flat screen member 304 is arranged at the standby position.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the white paint is applied to the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304. Then, an image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304. White and silver (gray) have at least a constant reflectance of visible light, and white has a higher light reflectance than silver. Therefore, the two-dimensional image projected on the white projection surface 304b can be made easier to see than, for example, the two-dimensional image projected on the projection surface 304b coated with the silver paint.

On the other hand, silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. Therefore, on the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, a three-dimensional image can be obtained more than when white paint is applied to these projection surfaces. It can be made to look three-dimensional.

<Control system of pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided in the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 (settings 1 to 6) or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

Further, the pachislot 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, an auxiliary relay board 61, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and a second interface board 402 for a testing machine. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (throwing operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 6 (7-segment display) and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs (hereinafter, "first LED" to "1st LED") for displaying the number of medals inserted, which are lit according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as "the number of inserted medals"). An LED that lights a mark indicating that medals can be inserted, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for replaying a game, etc., based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81 (referred to as the third LED). Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights up, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light up, and three medals (game). When the number of startable medals is turned on, the first LED to the third LED are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 401 for the testing machine and the second interface board 402 for the testing machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1 (test firing test). Since these relay boards are not mounted on the Pachislot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 401 for the tester and the tester. The various electronic components required to connect to the second interface board 402 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, and is determined by, for example, a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 402 for the testing machine.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61, and has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19, and a projected member moving mechanism 305 (display unit). ). Since the touch sensor 19 and the projected member moving mechanism 305 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 150) when the middle door 41 is opened.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a display device relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the display device relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 151, image (video) for production, audio (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 shows a specific example of the non-volatile storage unit (storage unit) according to the present invention.

The display device relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector 213 included in the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector 213 and the sub-display device 18 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, and a switching regulator 94 (power supply means).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for a game machine. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (instruction codes dedicated to the main CPU 101) specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be specified on the source program. In the present embodiment, the processing efficiency is improved and the program capacity is reduced by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 17 described later.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 15). Then, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the "XSRST" terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 is a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means for outputting (power failure means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5 V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (first storage means), a main RAM 103 (second storage means), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, and the like. It has a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the microprocessor 91 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 to control the game operation in general. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 150, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 to an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is transmitted by another component (for example, a timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 is configured to include a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a multiplication instruction (“MUL” instruction) on a source program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on this instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 has random number registers 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for an internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a signal port (memory map I / O) input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, power management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is connected to any of the input ports of PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and when the start switch 79 is turned on (on-edge), a latch signal is sent from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110. Is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101 has an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, and a timer based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Performs various interrupt processing such as update processing.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 402 for the testing machine.

<Sub-control circuit>
[Configuration of sub-control circuit]
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 150 (sub-control means) mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 150 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 150 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub control circuit 150 basically includes a sub CPU 151, a sub RAM 152, a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 153, a VRAM (Video RAM) 154, and a driver 155. The VRAM 154 (drawing RAM) includes a frame buffer and a screen buffer described later. The sub CPU 151 shows a specific example of the control processing unit according to the present invention, the GPU 153 shows a specific example of the image processing unit according to the present invention, and the VRAM 154 is a volatile storage unit. A specific example of the above is shown.

The sub CPU 151 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. Further, the driver 155 is connected to the display device relay board 87. That is, the driver 155 is connected to the projector 213 and the sub display device 18 via the display device relay board 87.

The sub CPU 151 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 151 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 and an effect registration for extracting a random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Includes various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of the LED.

The data storage area stores a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing the effect data constituting each effect content, and animation data (including image data and virtual object data described later) related to video creation. Contains storage areas to be stored. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 152 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 151, GPU 153 (rendering processor), VRAM 154, and driver 155 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the display device 11 (projector 213) and / or the sub display device 18. .. The display device 11 (projector 213) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 151 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 151 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

[Direction registration task]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, when the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90 is received by the sub control circuit 150, the sub control circuit 150 corresponds to the type of the command data based on the received command data. The effect to be produced is determined, and the display device 11 (projector 213), the sub-display device 18, the speaker group 84, and the LED group 85 are driven to control the effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the effect determination task (effect registration task) corresponding to the type of command data, which is executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151), will be described. Note that FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of the effect registration task in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 151 retrieves a message from the message queue (S1). Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S2). In S2, when the sub CPU 151 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S2 is NO), the sub CPU 151 performs the process of S5 described later.

On the other hand, in S2, when the sub CPU 151 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S2 is YES), the sub CPU 151 copies the game information from the message (S3). In this process, for example, various data such as information on the internal winning combination (main lottery flag, etc.), the type of reel whose rotation has stopped, the display combination, the game status flag, etc., which are specified by the parameters, are stored in the sub RAM 152. It is copied to the area (not shown).

Next, the sub CPU 151 performs the effect content determination process (S4). In this process, the sub CPU 151 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command.

After the processing of S4 or when the determination of S2 is NO, the sub CPU 151 performs the animation data generation and registration processing (S5). The animation data generation and registration process is performed based on the effect data (effect content) registered in the effect content determination process of S4. In the present embodiment, in this process, image data of image light projected on various projected members is created. The process of creating image data of video light projected on various projected members (PJ-compatible image data described later) will be described in detail later. Further, in the present embodiment, an example of generating image data of video light projected on various projected members (video signal corresponding to the video light emitted from the projector 213) during the processing of S5 will be described. The invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be executed in the effect content determination process of S4, or the animation data generation process and the registration process may be performed separately.

Next, the sub CPU 151 performs a sound data registration process (S6). Next, the sub CPU 151 registers the lamp data (S7). It should be noted that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data (effect content) registered in the effect content determination process of S4. Then, after the processing of S7, the sub CPU 151 returns the processing to S1 and repeats the processing after S1.

<Image data creation method>
Next, in various effects executed by the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, image data (projector) of video light projected on the projection surface of various projected members (trapezoidal member 302, pseudo reel member 303, and flat screen member 304). A method for creating a video signal (video signal corresponding to the video light emitted from the 213) will be described.

[Outline of image data creation method]
An outline of a method for creating image data of image light projected on various projected members will be described with reference to FIGS. 20A and 20B. Note that FIG. 20A is a diagram showing an image data conversion process in the image data creation process, and FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a main processing flow executed in the image data conversion process.

In the method for creating image data of video light projected on various projected members (PJ-compatible image data described later) in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20B, resource image / object composition processing and viewpoint change image data acquisition -The setting process and the SB image data setting process are executed in this order. The contents of each process will be described below.

(1) Resource image / object composition processing In the resource image / object composition processing, first, the projected members (trapezoidal member 302, pseudo reel member 303, flat screen member 304) to be projected stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 are Virtual object data (three-dimensional data) is selected (acquired). The virtual object data is, for example, data generated (converted) from the three-dimensional CAD data of the projected member, and is data indicating the three-dimensional structure (coordinates) of the projected member. The virtual object data shows a specific example of information for displaying an image on the display unit according to the present invention.

Further, in the resource image / object composition process, the resource image data (two-dimensional data) of the image data projected on the projected member is selected (acquired) from the ROM cartridge board 86. The resource image data shows a specific example of the original image data according to the present invention.

The selection process of the virtual object data and the resource image data is controlled by the sub CPU 151, and the sub CPU 151 is determined from a plurality of types of image data and a plurality of types of virtual object data stored in the ROM cartridge board 86. Select the resource image data and virtual object data corresponding to the effect content. Further, the selected resource image data and virtual object data are expanded in a buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer (FB) and the screen buffer (SB) described later in the VRAM 154. The virtual buffer shows a specific example of the first buffer according to the present invention, and the frame buffer shows a specific example of the second buffer (predetermined buffer) according to the present invention. The screen buffer is a specific example of a third buffer (specific buffer) according to the present invention.

Next, the selected virtual object is placed in the virtual space (VRAM 154) on the sub-side arithmetic processing. Specifically, the selected virtual object data is expanded on the VRAM 154. Next, in the virtual space, the direction from the player side toward the virtual object (hereinafter, referred to as "player's line of sight direction": in an actual game machine, the display device cover 30 and the display device 11 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). ) And the direction from the position on the player side), the projection of the virtual object when the video light of the selected resource image data is virtually (pseudo) illuminated (projected) on the projection surface of the virtual object. Image data (hereinafter referred to as "virtual projection image data") of an image projected (projected) on a surface is calculated (generated) by arithmetic processing. This virtual projection image data is generated by GPI153 performing 3D CG processing (including 3D coordinate calculation and the like) on the virtual object data and resource image data and synthesizing both data. This synthetic calculation process can be executed by using an algorithm used in conventional three-dimensional image programming or the like. The virtual projection image data shows a specific example of the data of the first viewpoint image (predetermined viewpoint image) according to the present invention, and the line-of-sight direction of the player is the first direction according to the present invention. A specific example of (predetermined direction) is shown.

The series of processes from the acquisition (expansion) process of the virtual object data and the resource image data described above to the composition process of both data (generation process of the virtual projection image data) is the resource image / object composition process shown in FIG. 20B. This process is performed and is executed by the GPU 153 based on the command of the sub CPU 151. Further, this resource image / object composition process is performed on the VRAM 154.

When the virtual object data having the three-dimensional space coordinates and the resource image data having the two-dimensional space coordinates are combined by the GPU 153, the two-dimensional coordinates of the resource image data are converted into the three-dimensional coordinates. In this conversion process, for example, Coordinate conversion processing may be sequentially performed on all the coordinates of the resource image data, or the coordinates are coordinated with respect to the coordinates of a predetermined reference number (for example, half of the total number of coordinates) among the total number of coordinates. The conversion process may be performed. When the latter method is adopted, for example, coordinate conversion processing is performed on the coordinates arranged at predetermined intervals with one or more coordinates sandwiched between them. Then, the value of the coordinates located between the coordinates subjected to the coordinate conversion process is calculated by a process such as linear interpolation. When the latter method is adopted, it is desirable to set the conversion reference number (coordinate number) to a number (conversion amount) according to the processing performance of the GPU 153. The processing performance of the GPU 153 is determined according to the processing speed of the GPU 153 and the number of cores included in the GPU 153 (the number of cores of a general GPU is about 64 to 2048), and the processing performance of the GPU 153 is low. In that case, the conversion reference number (coordinates) is reduced, and when the processing performance of the GPU 153 is sufficiently high and low, the conversion reference number (coordinates) is increased.

As described above, in the virtual projection image data generation process (composite process of resource image data and virtual object data) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (total number of coordinates or a predetermined reference number) in the resource image is two-dimensional. Since the coordinates are directly converted into three-dimensional coordinates by the three-dimensional CG processing, for example, the boundary portion between the four projection planes 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p (for example, the lower side portion of the projection plane 322p). And the distortion of the image on the boundary portion between the projection surface 321p and the upper side portion, etc.) can be minimized.

In the present embodiment, an example in which virtual object data and resource image data are selected from the ROM cartridge board 86 and acquired, and both of the acquired data are combined on the VRAM 154 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. .. For example, first, a plurality of types of virtual object data and a plurality of types of resource image data are loaded (read) from the ROM cartridge board 86 into an area other than the virtual buffer, frame buffer, and screen buffer described above on the VRAM 154. Then, a predetermined virtual object data and a predetermined resource image data are selected from the loaded plurality of types of virtual object data and a plurality of types of resource image data, and then both of the selected data are used as the present embodiment. Similarly, it may be expanded and synthesized in a virtual buffer, a frame buffer, and a screen buffer. Further, in this case, among the plurality of types of resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge board 86, only a plurality of resource image data belonging to the corresponding effect group are loaded based on, for example, a game state or an effect state. You may.

(2) Viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process In the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process, first, the image light (projected light) of the resource image data from the player's line of sight with respect to the projection surface of the virtual object in the virtual space. ) Is virtually projected (a state in which virtual projected image data is generated), the incident direction of the image light actually incident on the projection surface of the projected member (hereinafter referred to as “the incident direction of the actual image light”). From (referred to as), image data (hereinafter referred to as “virtually captured image data”) when a virtual projected image projected on the projection surface of a virtual object is virtually (pseudo) photographed is generated by arithmetic processing. That is, in a state where the video light of the resource image data is virtually projected onto the projection surface of the virtual object from the direction of the player's line of sight, the viewpoint is changed and the data of the image virtually projected on the projection surface of the virtual object is displayed. calculate. The virtual captured image data shows a specific example of the data of the second viewpoint image according to the present invention, and the actual incident direction of the video light is a specific example of the second direction according to the present invention. Is shown.

In this virtual shooting process, first, the incident direction of the actual video light on the virtual object is set (set) in the virtual space. In the present embodiment, as the actual incident direction of the image light, the incident direction of the image light incident on the projection surface of the projected member from the projector 213 via the reflection mirror 237, that is, the projection of the projected member from the reflection mirror 237. The direction toward the surface is set.

Next, the virtual projected image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object by the three-dimensional CG processing of GPU153 (including the calculation of coordinates from the incident direction (position of the virtual camera) of the actual video light) is converted into the actual video light. It is converted into a virtual captured image obtained when the image is virtually taken from the incident direction side of the above (converts the virtual projected image data developed on the VRAM 154 into virtual captured image data). The virtual captured image data generation process (conversion process from virtual projected image data to virtual captured image data) can be executed by using an algorithm used in conventional three-dimensional image programming or the like.

In the present embodiment, the viewpoint change process and the virtual photographed image data generation process at the time of generating the virtual captured image data described above are performed by the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process shown in FIG. 20B, and this process is a sub. It is executed by GPU 153 based on the command of CPU 151. Further, the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process is performed on the VRAM 154.

Here, FIG. 21 shows a state in which the image light of the resource image is virtually projected from the player's line of sight onto the projection surface of the virtual object of the projected member in the virtual space, and the actual image light. The state when the virtual projection image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object is virtually taken from the incident direction is shown. Further, FIG. 22 shows a specific example of the virtual projection image generated by the virtual projection operation of the resource image in the virtual space. 21 and 22 show an example in which the projected member to be projected with the image light is the trapezoidal member 302.

When the video light of the resource image data is virtually projected from the player's line of sight direction (arrow A2 direction in FIG. 21) onto the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 arranged in the virtual space, as shown in FIG. A resource image is virtually projected on each of the four projection planes 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p, and a virtual projection image is generated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, the resource image is converted into a three-dimensional image (virtual projection image) having a depth that reflects the shape of the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302. This virtual projection image is an image similar to the actual image that is visually recognized when the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is viewed from the player side in the real space. At this time, when the projection target of the image light is the trapezoidal member 302 or the pseudo reel member 303, the shape of the projection surface is a three-dimensional shape, so that a three-dimensional virtual projection image with depth can be obtained. However, when the projection target of the image light is the flat screen member 304, a flat virtual projection image can be obtained.

Then, in a state where the resource image is virtually projected on each of the four projection surfaces 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302, the actual incident direction of the image light (arrow A1 in FIG. 21). When the virtual projected image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object is virtually photographed from the direction), the virtual projected image is converted into a virtual photographed image from the direction of arrow A1.

When the image light (projected light) corresponding to the virtual captured image generated as described above is actually projected from the projector 213 onto the projection surface of the projected member via the reflection mirror 237, the actual incident image light is incident. When the projection surface of the projected member is viewed from the direction (reflection mirror 237 side), the image projected on the projection surface becomes an image similar to the virtual captured image generated in the virtual space. Then, in this situation, the actual image seen when the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is viewed from the player side becomes an image similar to the virtual projection image generated in the virtual space. That is, when the image light (projected light) corresponding to the virtual captured image data is actually projected from the projector 213 to the projected surface of the projected member via the reflection mirror 237, the projected surface of the projected member is viewed from the player side. You can see a projection image (three-dimensional image with depth) similar to the virtual projection image that reflects the shape of.

In the present embodiment, in the series of image data conversion processing from the resource image data to the virtual captured image data described above, the projected member is not the image data corresponding to the size (screen size) of the projected surface of the projected member. Image data having a size twice the size of the projection surface of is used as the image data to be processed.

Specifically, as the image data to be processed, an image in which dummy image data having the same size as the projection surface is added to the upper end of the image data of the image (projection target image) projected on the projection surface of the projected member. Data (image data in which the size in the height (upper and lower) direction of the image in the virtual space is twice that of the image to be projected) is used. That is, the image data to be processed in the series of image data conversion processing from the resource image data to the virtual captured image data described above is when the projected angle of view (viewing angle) in the height direction of the video light is doubled. It is size image data (hereinafter, also referred to as "double angle of view data"). Therefore, for example, when the size of the screen (projection surface) (projected image size) is 1280 pixels (horizontal) x 800 pixels (vertical), the image data to be processed (double angle of view data) The size is 1280 pixels (horizontal) x 1600 pixels (vertical).

Further, in the present embodiment, the resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 is preliminarily composed of double angle of view data. Therefore, at the time of reading out the resource image data in the resource image / object composition process, the mode of the image data to be processed is double angle of view data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the resource image data stored in the Rom cartridge substrate 86 is set as image data (image data of screen (projection surface) size) including only the image to be projected, and resource image / object composition is performed. In the process, dummy image data may be added to the read resource image data to generate double angle of view data.

In this embodiment, the reason for using the double angle of view data having the above-described configuration as the image data to be processed is as follows. Normally, when the light emitted from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface of the projected member, image distortion occurs at the center of the upper end or lower end of the image projected on the projection surface due to the optical characteristics of the projector 213. This is because a general projector is designed with a projection lens on the premise that the image light is projected onto the screen at an irregular angle (a trapezoidal angle of view with short and long sides). Is. The position where the distortion of the image occurs (the center of the upper end or the lower end of the image) is, for example, the mounting mode of the projector 213 inside the housing (the upper (ceiling) surface of the projector 213 is facing upward or lower). It changes depending on whether it is mounted toward (upside down) or the area where the projection lens is used (upper half or lower half). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the projection block 201 is configured so that the image is distorted at the center of the upper end of the image projected on the projection surface.

Further, the resource image data is generally generated as data for a liquid crystal display device, and the resource image data is also generated as data for a liquid crystal display device in this embodiment as well. Then, in the liquid crystal display device, the distortion of the image occurs at the center position on the screen, so the GPU 153 (or VDP) performs a process of suppressing (correcting) the distortion of the center of the image with respect to the resource image data.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the double angle of view data in which a dummy image is provided above the image (projection target image) to be virtual projection and virtual shooting is used as the processing target data of the GPU 153. , GPU153 performs a process for suppressing (correcting) image distortion at the center of the image of double angle of view data. In this case, since the center of the image of the double angle of view data is the center on the boundary line between the dummy image and the projection target image, the distortion of the image at the center position of the upper end portion of the projection target image is suppressed (corrected). .. As a result, when the image is actually projected onto the projection surface of the projected member by the projector 213, the image at the position where the image distortion occurs is corrected. In the present embodiment, the image distortion correction processing is performed on the double angle of view data expanded (stored) in the frame buffer, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in a virtual buffer. Image distortion correction processing may be performed on the expanded double angle of view data.

That is, in the present embodiment, the image distortion in the resource image data (double angle of view data) generated for the liquid crystal display device by using the double angle of view data having the above-described configuration as the processing target data of the GPU 153. (Center of double angle of view data) and the position of distortion (center of the upper end of the image to be projected) that occurs in the image actually projected by the projector 213 are adjusted to match. As a result, at the stage of generating PJ-compatible image data, it becomes possible to suppress (correct) the distortion of the image that occurs when the image is actually projected on the projection surface of the projected member by the projector 213. , It is possible to provide a player with a high-quality production image.

When, for example, data for a projector (image data in which distortion occurs at the center of the upper end or lower end of the image) is prepared in advance as the resource image data, a series from the resource image data to the virtual shot image data. In the image data conversion process of the above, the same size angle data without providing a dummy image may be used as the processing target data. In this case, the GPU 153 performs a process for suppressing (correcting) distortion of the image at the center of the upper end or lower end of the image of the same-magnification angle of view data.

Further, the virtual captured image data generated in the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process shown in FIG. 20B is set in the frame buffer (FB) provided in the VRAM 154 (drawing RAM), and this set process is performed by the GPU 153 ( It is controlled by the rendering processor). As described above, since the image data set in the frame buffer (FB) is double angle of view data (virtually captured image data + dummy image data), the frame buffer (FB) set in the VRAM 154 The size (the size of the storage area for the virtual captured image data) is also twice the size of the projection surface (screen size) of the projected member.

(3) SB image data setting process In the SB image data setting process, the image data of the image to be projected out of the double angle of view data (virtually captured image data + dummy image data) set in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154. That is, only the virtual captured image data is transferred to the screen buffer (SB) provided in the VRAM 154. Specifically, the image data in the area where the virtual captured image data is stored in the storage area of the frame buffer is copied to the screen buffer (dummy image data is not transferred to the screen buffer).

As a result, image data of the image light actually projected on the projection surface of the projected member (hereinafter referred to as “PJ-compatible image data”) is generated, and the PJ-compatible image data is stored in the screen buffer of the VRAM 154. The process for generating the PJ-compatible image data (the process of transferring the virtual captured image data to the screen buffer) is controlled by the GPU 153. Further, since the PJ-compatible image data is half the size of the image data to be processed, the size of the screen buffer of the VRAM 154 in which the PJ-compatible image data is set can be halved of the size of the frame buffer. it can.

Here, FIG. 23 shows an outline of the SB image data setting process. In the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process shown in FIG. 20B, when the virtual captured image data is set in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, a dummy is displayed in the upper half area of the frame buffer (FB) on the 23rd surface. Image data is stored, and virtual shooting image data is stored in the lower half area. Next, when the SB image data setting process in FIG. 20B is performed, only the data in the area where the virtual captured image data in the frame buffer is stored is transferred (copied) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154, and the data is transferred to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154. The transferred image data is set as PJ-compatible image data.

After that, the PJ-compatible image data set in the screen buffer is a video signal (for example, "V-by-one (registered trademark)", "DisplayPort (registered trademark)", "LVDS", and "Lockless Link (registered trademark)". ) ”, A video signal having interface specifications such as an analog RGB component video signal), and the video signal is output to the projector 213. Then, the projector 213 emits the video light corresponding to the PJ-compatible image data based on the input video signal. In the present embodiment, as described above, image data (PJ-compatible image data) of the image light actually projected on the projection surface of the projected member is generated. In the following, the method for generating PJ-compatible image data (and its video signal) according to the above-described embodiment will be referred to as a "virtual projection imaging method".

[Outline of generation of PJ-compatible image data when the projected member is movable]
In FIGS. 21 to 23, as an example of generating PJ-compatible image data, an example in which the projected member to be projected by the image light is only the trapezoidal member 302 (single and movable projected member) has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the method for generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method described above can also be applied to, for example, projecting video light in the production of the process of switching the projected member to be projected.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 24A to 24E, an outline of generation of PJ-compatible image data in the process of switching the projected member to be projected from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 will be described. 24A to 24E show a virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 and a virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 arranged in the virtual space in the process of switching the projected member to be projected from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303. It is a figure which shows the time change (time series change) of the positional relationship with.

In FIGS. 24A to 24E, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 is simplified and shown in order to clarify the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303. Specifically, the size of the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 is shown to be smaller than the actual size (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

FIG. 24A shows a position where the pseudo reel member 303 starts to be seen above the trapezoidal member 302 when viewed from the player side after the start of switching from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 (after the start of driving the pseudo reel member 303). It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of a trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of a pseudo reel member 303 when it moves to. FIG. 24B is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 moves to the upper part of the trapezoidal member 302. FIG. 24C is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the trapezoidal member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 moves to the vicinity of the upper front surface portion of the trapezoidal member 302. FIG. 24D is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 starts moving to the front surface of the trapezoidal member 302. Then, FIG. 24E shows when the pseudo reel member 303 moves to a position so as to cover the front surface (projection surface) of the trapezoidal member 302, and the operation of switching the projected member from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 is completed. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of a trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of a pseudo reel member 303.

When the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projected member) moves to the front surface of the trapezoidal member 302 in this way, first, the pseudo reel member moved to the corresponding position at predetermined timing intervals (time series). The virtual object data (hereinafter referred to as "synthetic virtual object data") of the virtual object (hereinafter referred to as "synthetic virtual object") obtained by synthesizing the virtual object 303p of 303 and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 is acquired. For example, in each of FIGS. 24A to 24E, the composite virtual object data of the virtual object 303p of the operating pseudo reel member 303 moved to the corresponding position and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 is acquired.

The control method for moving the virtual object 303p to the corresponding position in the virtual space is as follows. First, a frame generated based on pulse output data (not shown) of the drive motor 361 driven when the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 24A to the state shown in FIG. 24E, and for displaying an image. The time series data (hereinafter, "movement angle data") of the movement angle of the pseudo reel member 303 corresponding to the rate (30 fps in this embodiment) is acquired. Next, using the acquired movement angle data, the virtual object 303p is moved to the corresponding position at predetermined intervals (for example, every frame) by the 3D CG processing (including 3D coordinate calculation, etc.) of the GPU 153. Then, the data (virtual object data) of the moved virtual object 303p is generated.

In the present embodiment, the movement angle data for each timing (for example, for each frame) of predetermined intervals acquired when the movable projected member is in operation is prepared in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In the present embodiment, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, the data (virtual object data) of the virtual object 303p that has moved to the corresponding position at each predetermined interval timing is generated in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge board 86. Alternatively, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 that has moved to the corresponding position and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 may be combined at each timing of predetermined intervals to generate synthetic virtual object data. Further, for example, the synthetic virtual object data at each predetermined interval may be generated in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge board 86, and the corresponding synthetic virtual object data may be read out and used at each predetermined interval timing. Further, the predetermined interval at which the composite virtual object data is acquired can be arbitrarily set according to, for example, the frame rate of the video (moving image), the content of the video display effect, and the like.

Next, the video light of the resource image data (double angle of view data including the dummy image) is virtually projected onto the synthetic virtual object arranged in the virtual space from the player's line of sight direction (arrow A2 direction in FIG. 21). , Generate a virtual projection image that combines the resource image and the composite virtual object. Then, in a state where the resource image is virtually projected on the projection surface of the composite virtual object, the virtual image projected on the projection surface of the composite virtual object from the incident direction of the actual video light (arrow A1 direction in FIG. 21). The projected image is virtually photographed, and the virtual photographed image data (double angle of view data including the dummy image) is acquired.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the projected member to be projected is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projected member) and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 In the processing other than generating the virtual object data at predetermined intervals, the projected member to be projected by the image light described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23 is a trapezoidal member 302 (single and movable). The process is the same as when only the projected member) is used.

Here, an example of applying a PJ-compatible image data generation method by a virtual projection imaging method when the projected member to be projected is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 has been described. Not limited to. For example, even when the projected member to be projected is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the flat screen member 304, the composite virtual object data of the flat screen member 304 and the trapezoidal member 302 generated at predetermined timing intervals is used. , The method for generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method described above can be applied as it is. Further, for example, even when the movable image projection member and the non-movable projection member are used to execute a linked image display effect, the movable projection member and the non-movable projection member generated at predetermined timing intervals are used. By using the composite virtual object data, the PJ-compatible image data generation method by the virtual projection imaging method described above can be applied as it is. Further, for example, even in a gaming machine having a function of executing a linked image display effect using three or more projected members, by using synthetic virtual object data of three or more projected members, The method for generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method described above can be applied as it is.

[Procedure for generating PJ-compatible image data]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a PJ-compatible image data generation process (a series of processes from resource image / object composition process to video signal output process) performed by the sub-control circuit 150 by the virtual projection imaging method. A specific processing procedure will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure for generating PJ-compatible image data and corresponding video signals by the virtual projection imaging method.

First, the sub CPU 151 selects the resource image data to be displayed as an image this time from the various resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 (S11). The image data selected in the process of S11 is double angle of view data in which a dummy image having the same size as the resource image is added to the upper end of the resource image. Also, in this process, GPU153
(Rendering processor 153) expands the selected resource image data (double angle of view data) into the VRAM 154 (drawing RAM) based on the command of the sub CPU 151.

Next, the sub CPU 151 selects the virtual object data of the projected member to be projected this time from the various virtual object data stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 (S12). In this process, when the projected member to be projected is one projected member, only the virtual object data of the projected member is selected. Further, in this process, when there are a plurality of projected members to be projected, the synthetic virtual object data corresponding to the current timing is selected. Then, in this process, the GPU 153 expands the selected virtual object data into the VRAM 154 based on the command of the sub CPU 151.

The resource image data and virtual object data selected in the processes of S11 and S12 are expanded in the buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer (FB) and the screen buffer (SB) in the VRAM 154. Further, the processing order of S11 and S12 is arbitrary, and the processing of S11 may be performed after the processing of S12.

Next, the GPU 153 arranges the selected virtual object on the virtual space (VRAM154), and with respect to the projection surface of the virtual object, in the direction from the player side toward the virtual object (the direction of the player's line of sight). The video light of the selected resource image data is virtually projected (irradiated), and the image data (virtual projected image data) of the virtual projected image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object is generated (calculated) (S13). In this process, the resource image data (double angle data including dummy image data) expanded on the VRAM 154 in S11 by the three-dimensional CG process (including three-dimensional coordinate calculation, etc.) of the GPU 153 is on the VRAM 154 in S12. Virtual projection image data (double angle of view data including dummy image data) is generated (calculated) by being combined with the virtual object data expanded in.

Next, the GPU 153 determines the projection surface of the virtual object from the incident direction of the projected light (the incident direction of the actual image light) incident on the projection surface of the projected member from the projector 213 via the reflection mirror 237 in the virtual space. Generates (calculates) virtual captured image data (double angle of view data including dummy image data) when the virtual projected image projected on the image is virtually captured (S14). In this process, the viewpoint change process is performed by the 3D CG process (including coordinate calculation) of the GPU 153, and virtual captured image data (double angle of view data including dummy image data) is generated (calculated).

Next, the GPU 153 expands (sets) the virtual captured image data (double angle of view data including the dummy image data) generated in S14 into the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 (S15). Next, the GPU 153 uses the image data of the area (in FIG. 23, the lower half area of the frame buffer) in which the virtual captured image data is stored among the double angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB). As PJ-compatible image data, it is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 (S16).

Then, the GPU 153 converts the PJ-compatible image data copied to the screen buffer (SB) in S16 into a video signal, and outputs the video signal to the projector 213 (S17). In the present embodiment, the PJ-compatible image data (video signal) to be output to the projector 213 is generated as described above.

[Various effects]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the image data (virtual projection image) of the image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object when the image light is virtually projected onto the virtual object of the projected member arranged in the virtual space. Using the data and the virtual captured image data), the image data (PJ-compatible image data) of the image light actually projected on the projected member is generated. Therefore, when the projector 213 actually projects the image light onto the projected member, it is not necessary to perform the correction process for associating the projected image data with the shape of the projected surface (screen) of the projected member. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a variety of high-quality video display effects by making full use of the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in the cost related to CG creation.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the image data to be processed in the image data conversion process from the resource image data to the generation of the virtual photographed image data is the size (screen size) of the projection surface of the projected member. It is not the image data corresponding to the above, but the image data (double angle of view data) in which a dummy image having the same size as the image is added to the upper part of the image to be projected. In this case, distortion occurs at the center of the upper end of the projection target image, but as described above, in the present embodiment, the distortion at the upper end center of the projection target image is suppressed in advance at the stage of the PJ-compatible image data generation process ( It has been corrected). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress distortion of the image actually projected on the projection surface (screen) of the projected member, and it is possible to provide the player with a high-quality directed image.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if there are a plurality of projected members to be irradiated with the image light, the above-mentioned virtual projection imaging method (virtual projection process and virtual of the image light) for the composite virtual object of the plurality of projected members By applying the PJ-compatible image data generation method (shooting process), it is possible to actually generate image data of the image light projected on the projected member. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the image is projected onto an object such as a three-dimensional object (three-dimensional screen) using a projector, the deviation of the projected image with respect to the object can be suppressed to the minimum.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the plurality of projected members include a movable projected member (pseudo-reel member 303, etc.) and the movable projected member is in operation, synthesis is performed at predetermined intervals. By applying the PJ-compatible image data generation method by the virtual projection imaging method described above to the virtual object, it is possible to actually generate the image data to be projected on the projected member. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, even if the configuration (number, shape, arrangement relationship) and interlocking of the projected members become complicated, it is possible to easily execute a variety of high-quality image display effects. ..

<Various deformation examples>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including their effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes various other embodiments and modifications as long as the gist of the present invention described in the claims is not deviated.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when there are a plurality of projected members to be projected (see, for example, FIG. 24), the virtual projection photographing method (image) described above is applied to a composite virtual object of the plurality of projected members in the virtual space. Although an example of applying a method for generating PJ-compatible image data by virtual projection processing and virtual shooting processing of light) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, PJ-compatible image data may be generated by the following procedure.

First, the composite virtual object is decomposed into the virtual objects of each projected member. Next, virtual projection processing of the video light of the resource image is executed on each of the decomposed virtual objects in the same manner as in the above embodiment to create virtual projection image data. The synthetic virtual object shows a specific example of the first virtual object according to the present invention, and the virtual object of each projected member shows a specific example of the second virtual object according to the present invention. It is a thing. Further, the virtual photographed image data of each projected member shows a specific example of the data of the first viewpoint image according to the present invention.

Next, the virtual projection image data of each virtual object is combined. Next, virtual shooting processing (viewpoint change processing) is executed on the synthesized virtual projection image data in the same manner as in the above embodiment to create virtual shooting image data, and the virtual shooting image data is used as a frame of VRAM 154. Store in the buffer. Then, the virtual captured image data stored in the frame buffer is subjected to an image transfer (copy) process in the same manner as in the above embodiment to generate PJ-compatible image data. The synthesized virtual projection image data shows a specific example of the data of the composite image according to the present invention.

Here, an example of the method of this example will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the PJ-compatible image data generation method in the first modification.

In the example shown in FIG. 26, as a plurality of projected members to be projected, the trapezoidal member 302 described in the above embodiment and a pair of columnar projected members 501 and 502 (hereinafter, “a pair of columnar members 501”). , 502 ”) and an ellipsoidal spherical projected member 503 (hereinafter referred to as“ ellipsoidal sphere member 503 ”) will be described (see the projection object in FIG. 26). Further, in this example, a pair of columnar members 501 and 502 are arranged on the front surface (player side) of the trapezoidal member 302, and an ellipsoidal ball member 503 is arranged on the front surface (player side) of the pair of columnar members 501 and 502. An example of the arrangement will be described. Further, each of the pair of columnar members 501 and 502 is a movable projected member that can be rotationally driven with the central axis in the extending direction of each columnar member as a rotation axis. Each of the columnar members 501 and 502 and the ellipsoidal sphere member 503 also shows a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention.

In the PJ-compatible image data generation method of this example, first, in the virtual space, the virtual object (synthetic virtual object) of the projection object is the virtual object A of the trapezoidal member 302 and the pair of cylindrical projected members 501. It is decomposed into a virtual object B of 502 and a virtual object C of an elliptical spherical projected member 503. Next, the video light of the resource image is virtually projected onto each of the decomposed virtual objects from the player's line of sight, and the virtual object data and the resource image data are combined to form a virtual projection of each virtual object. Generate image data.

Next, the virtual projection image data of each generated virtual object is synthesized. At this time, the virtual projection image data of a plurality of virtual objects is combined in consideration of the arrangement relationship of each virtual object. Specifically, in the area where a plurality of virtual objects overlap in the virtual space, a plurality of virtual projections are displayed so that the image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object located in the foreground (most player side) is displayed. Image data is combined. As a result, the combined virtual projection image data (hereinafter referred to as “composite virtual projection image data”) shown at the bottom of FIG. 26 is generated. Then, in the same manner as in the above embodiment, the composite virtual projection image data is converted into virtual captured image data, and PJ-compatible image data is generated based on the virtual captured image data.

When the PJ-compatible image data generation method of this example described above is used, even if there are a plurality of projected members to be projected and a three-dimensional screen is composed of the plurality of projected members, the projected member Virtually captured image data can be generated for each virtual object, and the generated virtual projection image data can be combined to generate synthetic virtual projection image data of a stereoscopic screen composed of a plurality of projected members. Therefore, when the PJ-compatible image data is created by the method of this example, the deviation of the projected position of the image from the ideal position when the actual image light is projected on the stereoscopic screen composed of a plurality of projected members is minimized. It can be suppressed to the limit. That is, in the method of this example, it is possible to minimize the deviation of the projected image with respect to the stereoscopic screen (object) composed of a plurality of projected members.

Further, also in this example, as in the above embodiment, when the image light is actually projected on the projected member by the projector 213, the projected image data is associated with the shape of the projected surface (screen) of the projected member. Since the correction process is not required, it is possible to execute a variety of high-quality image display effects by making full use of the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in the cost related to CG creation.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the virtual projection processing and virtual shooting processing of an image in the virtual space, the image to be processed (calculated) is double angle of view data in which a dummy image of the same size as the image is added to the upper part of the image to be projected. Used as data. Then, when the PJ-compatible image data is generated, the image data in the area where the virtual captured image data is stored is used as the PJ-compatible image data among the double-angle angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154. The technique of copying to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 was used. However, the method of converting the double angle of view data into the PJ compatible image data (the method of extracting the PJ compatible image data from the double angle of view data) is not limited to the example of the above embodiment.

For example, a process of extracting virtual shot image data from the double angle of view data before expanding the double angle of view data including the virtual shot image data generated by the virtual shooting process in the virtual space into the frame buffer (FB). May be provided. In the second modification, as an example, an example in which the 2x angle of view data including the virtual captured image data is subjected to a projective conversion process and the virtual captured image data is extracted from the 2x angle of view data will be described.

In the three-dimensional CG technology, the projective transformation process is usually an arithmetic process used when projecting a virtual three-dimensional object arranged in a virtual space onto a screen. First, a general projective transformation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 27A and 27B.

In FIG. 27A, a rectangular object arranged at a predetermined position (“near” in FIG. 27A) on the projector side (light source side) is enlarged and projected on the screen arrangement position (“far” in FIG. 27A). It is a figure which shows the state at the time of this. Further, FIG. 27B converts the coordinates of the rectangular object arranged in “near” in FIG. 27A into the coordinates of the rectangular object when projected on the screen (“far” in FIG. 27A). It is a figure which shows the projection matrix P (projection transformation matrix) used for this.

The projection matrix P is a square matrix with 4 rows and 4 columns. In the projection matrix P, the value of the [1 (row), 1 (column)] component is "x", the value of the [2,2] component is "y", and the value of the [3,1] component is. The value of the [3,2] component is "b", the value of the [3,3] component is "c", and the value of the [3,4] component is "-1". Yes, the value of the [4,3] component is "d". The value of the other component is "0".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, the values (x, y, a, b, c, d) of each component in the projection matrix P are the position "near" of the rectangular object and the position "far" of the screen. , Parameters "top" and "bottom" that define the height (vertical) direction coordinates of the rectangular object before projection (before projection conversion), and the width (horizontal) direction coordinates of the rectangular object before projection. Parameters "left" and "right", the length (height) "height" in the height direction and the length (width) "wise" in the width direction of the rectangular object after projection (after projective transformation). , Calculated based on the viewing angle "favy" (projected angle of view) of the light (projected light) emitted from the projector (light source) and the aspect ratio "rectangle" of the screen.

Then, when the coordinates of the rectangular object at the position “near” in FIG. 27A are multiplied by the projection matrix P in FIG. 27B (when the coordinates are converted by the projection matrix P), the position “far” in FIG. 27A is displayed. The coordinates of the rectangular object projected (enlarged and displayed) on) are calculated.

In this example, the projection matrix P of FIG. 27B is modified and used, and the virtual captured image data is extracted from the double angle of view data including the virtual captured image data. That is, in this example, image data having a size twice the screen size (double angle of view data) is converted into screen size image data (equal size angle of view data). As for the double angle of view data used in this example, a dummy image having the same size as the image is added to the upper end of the image (projection target image) projected on the projection surface of the projected member, as in the above embodiment. Image data is used (see FIG. 23).

FIG. 28 shows the projection matrix Pe used when extracting the virtual captured image data (PJ-compatible image data) from the double angle of view data including the virtual captured image data in this example. In this example, as the projection matrix Pe, as shown in FIG. 28, a matrix obtained by multiplying the projection matrix P'and the offset matrix O is used. The projection matrix Pe shows a specific example of a specific conversion parameter according to the present invention.

The projection matrix P'is a square matrix of 4 rows and 4 columns, and is a projective transformation matrix in which the viewing angle (favy) is set to 1/2 (predetermined angle) in the general projection matrix P shown in FIG. 27B. .. In this example, as described above, the 2x angle of view data is converted into the 1x angle of view data, so the viewing angle (projection angle of view) is set to half the value of the general projection matrix P. To. Further, in the offset matrix O, the values of the [1 (row), 1 (column)] component, the [2,2] component, the [3,3] component, the [4,4] component, and the [4,2] component are It is composed of a 4-by-4 square matrix having "1" and the values of other components being "0". The projection matrix P'shows a specific example of the predetermined projective transformation parameter according to the present invention, and the offset matrix O shows a specific example of the predetermined offset parameter according to the present invention.

Then, in this example, the projection matrix Pe is multiplied by the coordinates of the double-angle data before expanding the double-angle data including the virtual captured image data into the frame buffer (FB). As a result, only the virtual captured image data is extracted from the double angle of view data including the virtual captured image data. Although a specific example of this extraction result is not shown in the present specification, in the verification experiment of the inventor, the double angle data of the configuration to be processed in this example is multiplied by the projection matrix Pe shown in FIG. 28 (projection conversion). ), It is confirmed that the virtual captured image data is extracted from the double angle of view data including the virtual captured image data.

By the method of this example, the extracted virtual captured image data is expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Then, the virtual captured image data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 is copied to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data.

As described above, in this example, the size of the image data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) is half that of the above embodiment, so that the size of the frame buffer (FB) is also half that of the above embodiment. Can be. Therefore, in this example, the frame buffer (FB) having the same size as the screen size can be used to perform the same three-dimensional CG processing as in the above embodiment, so that the usage status of the VRAM 154 is not wasted. , The processing efficiency of GPU 153 can be improved.

Further, also in this example, as in the above embodiment, when the image light is actually projected on the projected member by the projector 213, the projected image data is associated with the shape of the projected surface (screen) of the projected member. Since the correction process is not required, it is possible to execute a variety of high-quality image display effects by making full use of the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in the cost related to CG creation.

In the image data conversion process of this example, a determinant (matrix operator) is used as a specific example of the specific conversion parameter, the predetermined projection conversion parameter, and the predetermined offset parameter according to the present invention, and the calculation is performed by the determinant. Although an example of converting image data has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, image data (pre-conversion data and post-conversion data) before and after the conversion process may be prepared in advance, and the pre-conversion data may be directly replaced with the post-conversion data by a predetermined conversion command or the like. In this case, a predetermined conversion command or the like is a specific example of a specific conversion parameter, a predetermined projective conversion parameter, and a predetermined offset parameter.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, an example in which the virtual projection imaging method is actually used as a method for creating PJ-compatible image data of the image light projected from the projector 213 onto the projected member has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as a method for creating PJ-compatible image data, a method called a texture mapping (projection mapping) method may be adopted.

In the third modification, a method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method will be described. The texture mapping method is a method of generating a three-dimensional image by virtually pasting a two-dimensional image on a three-dimensional object (model).

(1) Outline of Texture Mapping Method FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an outline of a method for creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method. In the example shown in FIG. 29, an example is shown in which the projected member to be projected is a trapezoidal member 302 (see FIG. 8), but in the technique described below, the projected member to be projected is a pseudo reel member. The same applies to the case of 303 or the flat screen member 304.

In FIG. 29, the image data of the area A in the resource image data is mapped to the projection surface 322a (see FIG. 8) of the trapezoidal member 302, and the image data of the area B is mapped to the projection surface 321a of the trapezoidal member 302. An example is shown in which the image data of C is mapped to the projection surface 323a of the trapezoidal member 302, and the image data of the area D is mapped to the projection surface 324a of the trapezoidal member 302.

The resource image data used in this example can be configured in the same manner as that of the above embodiment. Further, in this example, the image data to be processed in the process of creating the PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method is a dummy having the same size as the image at the upper end of the image to be projected, as in the above embodiment. It is double angle of view data to which an image is added.

Then, in the texture mapping method, each pixel data of the resource image data in the double angle data is converted into texture data of the trapezoidal member 302 corresponding to the coordinates of each pixel (coordinate data of the resource image and coordinates related to the structure of the trapezoidal member 302). Image data (two-dimensional image data) after texture mapping is created by performing an operation of pasting to texture coordinates (UV coordinates) using data). In FIG. 29, for simplification of the description, only the pixel data of the coordinates of the vertices of the regions A to D in the resource image data is pasted on the coordinates (texture coordinates) of the vertices of the corresponding projection plane of the trapezoidal member 302. Shows how it is attached. The texture data shows a specific example of the texture information according to the present invention or the information for displaying an image on the display unit, and the image data after the texture mapping is the pseudo three-dimensional image data according to the present invention. A specific example of the above is shown.

The texture coordinates of the texture data are data generated (converted) from the three-dimensional CAD data of the trapezoidal member 302. Specifically, the texture data corresponds to the data (x1, y1) to (x8, y8) of each vertex coordinate of the area A to the area D of the resource image, and each vertex coordinate of the area A to the area D. The vertex coordinates (x1', y1') to (x8', y8') in the virtual object data of the trapezoidal member 302 are set. Then, in the mapping process, the GPU 153 corresponds each pixel data of each vertex coordinate ((x1, y1) to (x8, y8)) of the area A to the area D of the resource image in the virtual object data of the trapezoidal member 302. Map to the coordinates of the vertices ((x1', y1') to (x8', y8')). Further, in this mapping process, the GPU 153 calculates the coordinates between the vertex coordinates in the virtual object data by linear interpolation based on the coordinate data (vertical coordinates) of the texture data, and each of the coordinates other than the vertex coordinates of the resource image data. Each pixel data is mapped to the corresponding coordinates in the virtual object data.

Next, when the image data after texture mapping is generated, the double angle of view data including the image data is expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154. After that, of the double angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB), the image data in the area where the image data after texture mapping to be projected is stored is used as the PJ-compatible image data in the screen buffer of the VRAM 154 ( It is copied (transferred) to SB).

The method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method can also be applied to, for example, the case where the projected member to be projected is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 described in FIG. 24. In this case, the resource image data is mapped (pasted) to the composite texture data of the texture data of the operating pseudo-reel member 303 (movable projected member) and the texture data of the trapezoidal member 302 generated at each predetermined timing. By attaching), PJ-compatible image data can be generated.

Further, the method for creating PJ-compatible image data in this example can also be applied to a case where the projected member to be projected is a three-dimensional screen composed of a plurality of projected members, as shown in FIG. 26, for example. In this case, PJ-compatible image data is generated by acquiring composite texture data (texture data of a three-dimensional screen) of a plurality of projected members and mapping (pasting) resource image data to the composite texture data. be able to. Further, in this case, as in the first modification, the composite texture data of the plurality of projected members is decomposed into the texture data of each projected member, and the resource image corresponding to the texture data of each of the decomposed projected members is generated. The PJ-compatible image data may be generated by mapping and synthesizing the mapped image data of each projected member.

(2) Procedure for creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a specific processing procedure for generating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method, which is performed in the sub-control circuit 150, is described. explain. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure for generating PJ-compatible image data and the corresponding video signal by the texture mapping method.

First, the sub CPU 151 selects the resource image data to be displayed as an image this time from the various resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 (S21). The image data selected in the process of S21 is double angle of view data in which a dummy image having the same size as the resource image is added to the upper end of the resource image. Further, in this process, the GPU 153 (rendering processor 153) expands the selected resource image data into the VRAM 154 (drawing RAM) based on the command of the sub CPU 151.

Next, the sub CPU 151 selects the texture data of the projected member to be projected this time from the texture data of various projected members (three-dimensional data regarding the structure of the projected member) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. (S22). In this process, when the projected member to be projected is one projected member, only the texture data of the projected member is selected. Further, in this process, when there are a plurality of projected members to be projected, the composite texture data corresponding to the current timing is selected. Then, in this process, the GPU 153 expands the selected texture data into the VRAM 154 based on the command of the sub CPU 151.

The resource image data and texture data selected in the processes of S21 and S22 are expanded in the buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer and the screen buffer in the VRAM 154. Further, the processing order of S21 and S22 is arbitrary, and the processing of S21 may be performed after the processing of S22.

Next, GPU 153 performs texture mapping processing (S23). In this process, the resource image data selected in the process of S21 and the texture data of the projected member selected in the process of S22 are used to convert each pixel data of the resource image to the projected surface of the corresponding projected member. Performs the process (mapping) of pasting to the position.

Next, the GPU 153 expands (sets) the double angle of view data including the image data after the mapping process generated in S23 into the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 (S24). Next, the GPU 153 is an area (in FIG. 23, the lower half of the frame buffer) in which the image data after the mapping process to be projected is stored in the double angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB). The image data of the area) is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data (S25).

Then, the GPU 153 converts the PJ-compatible image data copied to the screen buffer (SB) in S25 into a video signal, and outputs the video signal to the projector 213 (S26). In this example, the PJ-compatible image data (video signal) to be output to the projector 213 is generated as described above.

(3) Various effects When the texture mapping method is adopted as the method for creating PJ-compatible image data as in this example, PJ-compatible image data can be created with simpler processing, so the cost of creating CG is reduced. It is possible to perform various effects with high image quality by making full use of 3D CG while suppressing the increase. Further, in this example, since a movie after projecting video light on the projected member can be prepared, the movie can be played back without any problem even if the processing performance of the GPU (VDP (Video Display Processor)) is low. And texture mapping (projection mapping) can be used for general purposes.

Further, also in this example, the image data to be processed in the process of creating the PJ-compatible image data is image data (double angle of view data) in which a dummy image of the same size as the image is added to the upper part of the projection target image. .. Therefore, in this example as well, as in the above embodiment, distortion of the image actually projected on the projection surface (screen) of the projected member can be suppressed at the stage of creating the image data, and a high-quality effect can be produced. The image can be provided to the player.

In the method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method, each pixel data of the resource image data is simply pasted to the texture data coordinates of the projected member corresponding to the coordinates of each pixel. This is a simpler method than the method using the virtual projection imaging method described in the embodiment. However, the method using texture mapping is more likely to cause image distortion near the boundary between the projection planes of the trapezoidal member 302 shown in FIG. 29, as compared with the method using the virtual projection imaging method. From the viewpoint of image quality, the method using the virtual projection imaging method described in the above embodiment is superior.

Further, in the examples described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, an example in which the texture mapping process is performed in real time using the GPU 153 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following method is used. May be good. First, image data in which a resource image is mapped to a projected member in advance is created by a three-dimensional CG tool or the like, and the image data after the mapping is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Next, at the time of image display, the sub CPU 151 selects predetermined image data from various mapped image data stored in the rom cartridge substrate 86, and outputs the image data to the projector 213 as PJ-compatible image data.

Further, in the examples described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, when the PJ-compatible image data is generated, the double angle of view data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 is processed after mapping to be a projection target. Although the example of copying the image data of the area in which the image data of the above is stored as the PJ-compatible image data to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the method described in the above modification 2, the projection matrix Pe shown in FIG. 28 is multiplied (projection conversion) by the double angle of view data including the image data after the mapping process of the projection target. The image data (1x angle of view data) after the mapping process to be projected may be extracted from the 2x angle of view data. In this case, the extracted image data (equal-magnification angle-of-view data) after the mapping process of the projection target is expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, and the expanded equal-magnification angle-of-view data is used as PJ-compatible image data. , Is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154.

[Other various modifications]
In the above embodiment, an example in which the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 is formed of a flat surface and a white paint is applied to the projection surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the print sheet may be attached to the projection surface 304b (second plane) of the flat screen member 304. Further, in this case, for example, the print sheet may be divided into a plurality of areas, and different paintings or symbols may be formed in each area. Then, an image (image) that illuminates different paintings or symbols in a predetermined order may be displayed by the image light emitted from the projector 213. In this case, a so-called roulette effect can be performed in which any painting (symbol) is selected.

Further, in the above embodiment, a configuration example for moving the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The projected member according to the present invention is not limited to the one in which the entire projected member moves. For example, the projected member is provided with a movable portion so that a part (movable portion) of the projected member moves. May be good. In this case, by projecting the image light according to the movement of the movable portion, it is possible to display a dynamic image, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the image.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the display device 11 having the projector 213 is arranged at a position facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 inside the cabinet 2a has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, an opening may be provided in the waist panel 12, and a display device having a projector may be arranged at a position facing the opening of the waist panel 12 inside the cabinet 2a. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the display device 11 is arranged inside the cabinet 2a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a display device having a projector may be arranged on the front door 2b.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as an image projected on the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, an image in which the symbol changes according to the operation (start operation) of the start lever 16 may be adopted. Then, in this case, on the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, an image of stopping the fluctuating symbol may be displayed in accordance with the pressing operation (stop operation) of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of adopting a method (front projection) of projecting the light of the projector from the surface side of the projection surface (screen) of the projected member to display an image has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, a method (rear projection) in which the light of the projector is projected onto the screen from the back surface (rear surface) side to display an image may be adopted, and even in this case, the optimum effect can be obtained. Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, as the display device, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a display device such as an organic / inorganic EL can be used instead of the projector.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the display device will be described. The pachi-slot machine of the second embodiment includes a display device 110 in place of the display device 11 (for example, see FIG. 5) included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The display device 110 included in the pachi-slot machine of the second embodiment is different from the above-mentioned display device 11 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the structure of the projected block and the front rear of the front panel 10 are different. The point is that it is configured to include a production unit 900. That is, the pachislot machine of the second embodiment includes the projected block 203 instead of the projected block 202. Further, the front panel 500 is provided in place of the front panel 10. The other configurations except the display device 110 (more specifically, the projected block 203) are the same as those of the first embodiment except that the front effect unit 900 is provided, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 31 is an external perspective view of the display device 110 according to the second embodiment. The display device 110 includes a projection block 201 and a projected block 203 arranged below the projection block 201. The image projected by the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected on the projected block 203 by the reflecting member 212 (see, for example, FIG. 6). FIG. 32 is a perspective view of the projected block 203, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the projected block 203 shown in FIG. 32.

Note that FIG. 32 shows a case where the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, which will be described later, and is therefore projected from the projector 213 for reference. FIG. 34 shows a case where the image light is projected onto the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 described later, and the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 described later. The case of being projected on is shown in FIG.

<Projected block>
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the projected block 203 is below the movable screen unit 700, a pair of screen drive bases (left screen drive base 702, right screen drive base 704), and the movable screen unit 700. A fixed base 708 provided, an upper base 706 provided on the upper back surface of the movable screen unit 700, a drive mechanism 815 capable of rotating the pillar screen 710 described later of the movable screen unit 700, and a movable screen unit 700. 722 (for example, see FIG. 33), which is the center of rotation of the movable screen unit 700, a stopper mechanism 790 (for example, see FIG. 49 described later) for blocking the rotation of the movable screen unit 700, and the rotation direction of the movable screen unit 700. It includes an optical sensor unit 800 (for example, see FIG. 52 described later) that functions as a position detecting means for detecting a position in the screen.

(1) Movable screen unit FIG. 36 is an external perspective view of the movable screen unit 700. As shown in FIG. 36, the movable screen unit 700 includes a triangular prismatic column screen 710 having a hollow inside (see, for example, FIG. 37 described later) and a right base 732 that closes the right side surface of the columnar screen 710 in front view. A left base 736 (see FIG. 37 described later) that closes the left side surface of the column screen 710 when viewed from the front, and a rotary gear mechanism 740 are provided.

In addition, in this specification, "front" means the front of a pachislot machine. Therefore, "front view" means that the pachislot is viewed from the front.

FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the movable screen unit 700 disassembled into a pillar screen 710, a right base 732, a left base 736, and a rotary gear mechanism 740.

(1-1) Pillar Screen The configuration of the pillar screen 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. 38 and 39 are both exploded perspective views of the pillar screen 710, and the angles at which the pillar screen 710 is viewed are different between FIGS. 38 and 39.

The pillar screen 710 includes a first screen member 712, a second screen member 714, and a third screen member 716. The first screen member 712, the second screen member 714, and the third screen member 716 are all formed into a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

The first screen member 712 includes a rectangular flat panel 7121 and a flat panel base 7125.

The flat panel 7121 has a projection surface 7123 (lower surface shown in FIGS. 38 and 39) on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed, and the projection surface 7123 and the back surface 7124 of the projection surface 7123. Are all flat.

The flat panel base 7125 is a base that serves as a base for the flat panel 7121, and has a function of increasing the rigidity of the first screen member 712. The flat panel 7121 is fixed to the surface side of the flat panel base 7125 (the lower surface side shown in FIGS. 38 and 39) by a predetermined method such as an engaging means or an adhesive means. Further, the flat panel base 7125 is formed with a rib group 7126 composed of a large number of ribs on the back surface side (upper surface side shown in FIGS. 38 and 39).

The second screen member 714 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a projection surface 7141 on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. The projection surface 7141 is a view of the course from the bow. It is a concave curved surface that makes you imagine.

The third screen member 716 includes a three-dimensional object 7166 and a three-dimensional object base 7161 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Both the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 function as a projection surface 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the three-dimensional object 7166 has a convex shape reminiscent of an open book. By projecting from the projector 213, the projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional object 7166 can display an image as if characters were written on a book or an image of turning pages. The three-dimensional object base 7161 has two openings 7163, and the openings are closed by the three-dimensional object 7166 so that the two openings 7163 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Although the surface of both the three-dimensional object 7166 and the three-dimensional object base 7161 functions as a projection surface, since the three-dimensional object has a convex shape, the periphery thereof (for example, the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161) Has a shaded area.

As described above, both the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 are not limited to functioning as a projection surface 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. Of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the three-dimensional object base 7161, only the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 may function as the projection surface 7167, and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 may not function as the projection surface 7167.

In this way, when each projection surface 7123, 7141, 7167 has a different three-dimensional (undulating) shape and the image light corresponding to the three-dimensional shape of each projection surface is projected from the projector 213, each projection surface 7123, 7141, With the features of the 7167 three-dimensional shape and the image light, it is possible to realize a realistic effect for the player.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the pillar screen 710 as viewed from a direction in which the male rib 7145 is sandwiched between the female ribs 7164, which will be described later, can be visually recognized. Further, FIG. 41 is a side view of the pillar screen 710 as viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, in the pillar screen 710, the long-side end of the first screen member 712 and the long-side end of the second screen member 714 are joined to each other. The end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 are joined to each other, and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 and the first The long side ends of the screen member 712 are joined to each other. In this way, the three screen members 712,714,716 form a hollow triangular column.

The second screen member 714 is formed with a groove 7142 along the long side on the back surface on the side where the first screen member 712 is joined. Then, the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 is applied to the groove 7142 so that the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 are formed. The ends are joined. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the two end portions of the first screen member 712 on the long side side and the end portion of the second screen member 714 on the long side side. Therefore, the movable screen unit 700 is in a position where the joint portion (corner portion of the triangular prism) between the long side end portion of the first screen member 712 and the long side end portion of the second screen member 714 can be seen from the front view. Is located, it reduces the discomfort that can be caused by the gap between the long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714. be able to.

Further, in the second screen member 714, a groove 7143 is formed along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined with the third screen member 716. Then, the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 is applied to the groove 7143 so that the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 are placed. The ends are joined. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the two end portions of the second screen member 714 on the long side side and the end portion of the third screen member 716 on the long side side, and a gap is formed. It is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by.

Further, the third screen member 716 is formed with a groove 7163 along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined with the first screen member 712. Then, the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 is applied to the groove 7163 so that the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 and the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 are placed. The ends are joined. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the long side end of the third screen member 716 and the long side end of the first screen member 712, and a gap is formed. It is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by.

In this way, the gaps that may occur at the corners (joints) of the triangular columnar pillar screen 710 are filled, so that even when the corners of the pillar screen 710 face the front, the projection is performed from the projector 213. It is possible to suppress the interruption of the continuity of the resulting image as much as possible, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort that can be caused by the gap. Here, "the continuity of the image is interrupted" means that when one image is projected, one image is divided like a shadow or a streak that crosses the one image. It is equivalent to doing something like that. For example, when a character's face is projected, if an unintended shadow or streak that crosses the character's face occurs, the projected image will be interrupted, giving a sense of discomfort. There is a risk that the interest will decline. Therefore, by filling the gaps that may occur at the corners of the prism, the continuity of the image can be maintained as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The second screen member 714 has male ribs 7145 protruding from the back surface formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction near the joint with the third screen member 716 (for example, FIGS. 39 and 40). reference). Further, in the third screen member 716, female ribs 7164 (two ribs) protruding from the back surface are formed at a portion corresponding to the above-mentioned male rib 7145 (for example, FIGS. 39 and 40, which will be described later). See 44). Then, when both ribs 7145 and 7164 are engaged, the male rib 7145 is sandwiched by the female rib 7164, and the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined at both ends in the left-right direction. Will be done.

42 is an exploded perspective view of the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714, FIG. 43 is a sectional perspective view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 41, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 1st screen member 712 and the 3rd screen member 716.

As shown in FIG. 42, the second screen member 714 has two rod-shaped arm members 7144 extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side on the first screen member 712 side in the middle abdomen in the longitudinal direction. Is provided. The arm member 7144 is fixed to the flat panel base 7125 via the screen locking member 718.

More specifically, the screen locking member 718 is formed with two insertion holes 7182 through which the arm member 7144 can be inserted. Further, a pair of screen locking ribs 7128 for fixing the screen locking member 718 are formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125. Then, after inserting the arm member 7144 into the insertion hole 7182, the arm member 7144 is screwed with the screw 717, and then the pair of screen locking ribs 7128 and the screen locking member 718 are screwed with the screw 719. The screen member 712 of 1 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined in the middle abdomen in the left-right direction. By the way, when two screen members are joined, a gap is generated between the two screen members (particularly in the middle abdomen) due to the clearance between the two screen members and the distortion generated when the screen paint is coated. There is a risk. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined in the middle portion in the left-right direction, the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are respectively. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the two that may occur in the mid-abdomen in the longitudinal direction of the.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the three-dimensional object base 7161 constituting the third screen member 716 has two rod-shaped objects extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side in the middle abdomen in the longitudinal direction. An arm member 7162 is provided. Further, on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125, a pair of screen locking ribs 7129 for fixing the screen locking member 718 are formed. Then, after inserting the arm member 7162 into the insertion hole 7182 of the screen locking member 718, the arm member 7162 is screwed with the screw 717, and then the pair of screen locking ribs 7129 and the screen locking member 718 are screwed with the screw 719. By stopping, the first screen member 712 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined in the middle abdomen in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the generation of a gap between the first screen member 712 and the third screen member 716, which may occur in the middle abdomen in the longitudinal direction of each of the third screen member 716.

The pillar screen 710 of the present embodiment is hollow, but is not limited to this, and is a solid or a mixture of a hollow portion and a solid portion (hereinafter, referred to as "semi-solid"). You may. For example, when it is desired to increase the rigidity of the pillar screen 710, it is preferable to make it solid, and when it is desired to reduce the weight of the pillar screen 710, it is preferable to make it hollow. Further, the ratio of the hollow portion to the solid portion may be appropriately changed to reduce the weight as much as possible while maintaining the rigidity of the pillar screen 710. Further, if the three-dimensional shapes of the projection surfaces 7123, 714, 7167 are different as in the present embodiment, the pillar screen 710 may be unbalanced when rotated. Therefore, by adjusting the ratio and the location of the solid portion and the hollow portion, it is possible to prevent the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 from becoming unbalanced even though the three-dimensional shapes are different.

Further, the pillar screen 710 of the present embodiment is a triangular prism pillar screen 710, but the screen is not necessarily limited to a triangular prism, and may be a square prism pillar screen or a more polygonal prism pillar screen. However, considering that the screen on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed may be changed from the current screen to a specific screen, a triangular prismatic pillar screen is preferable. This is because, in the case of a polygonal prism that is more than a square prism, it may be necessary to go through an unrelated screen before changing from the current screen to a specific screen, but in the case of a triangular prism, , You can change from the current screen to a specific screen without going through an unrelated screen. This is because when the columnar screen is a triangular prism, any of the three screens is adjacent to the other two screens.

Further, although the pillar screen 710 of the present embodiment has a pillar shape, it does not necessarily have to be a pillar screen, for example, a substantially L-shaped screen composed of two screens adjacent to each other. It may be a screen, or it may be a substantially U-shaped screen composed of three screens adjacent to each other.

Further, in the pillar screen 710 of the present embodiment, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is flat, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is concave, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 ( More specifically, the projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional object 7166; the same shall apply hereinafter) is convex, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a combination of a plurality of three-dimensional shapes of flat, concave and convex. You may.

Further, in the pillar screen 710 of the present embodiment, all three projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 have different three-dimensional shapes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one projection surface has a three-dimensional shape. If it is different from the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface of, it is possible to change the visual impression and enhance the interest. For example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 have similar three-dimensional shapes, and only the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 has a different three-dimensional shape. The case corresponds.

Further, the area size on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed and the material of the projection surface are the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the third screen. It may be the same as or different from the projection surface 7167 of the member 716.

(1-2) Right Base, Left Base, and Rotating Gear Mechanism The configurations of the right base 732, the left base 736, and the rotating gear mechanism 740 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

A trapezoidal right base 732 is attached to the right opening end surface of the pillar screen 710, and a triangular left base 736 is attached to the left opening end surface of the pillar screen 710. A small cylindrical portion 707 projecting to the front surface side (outer right) of the pillar screen 710 extends from the right base 732. A rotary gear mechanism 740 is fixed to the cylindrical portion 707.

The right base 732 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7322 and a long side portion 7324, and two rod-shaped weight members 7326 are provided on the back surface (inward left) in the vicinity of the long side portion 7324. .. Similarly, the left base 736 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7362 and a long side portion 7364, and two rod-shaped weight members 7366 are provided in the vicinity of the long side portion 7364 (inward right). ..

The weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided to balance the rotation of the pillar screen 710. That is, since the pillar screen 710 of the present embodiment has different three-dimensional shapes of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed, it is between the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167. There is a risk that the rotation balance will be unbalanced due to a weight difference. It is considered that such an imbalance may occur when the rotation shaft 722 and the center of gravity of the column screen 710 in the longitudinal direction are largely deviated from each other. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided, the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125 of the first screen member 712, and the three-dimensional shape of the third screen member 716 is formed. By providing an opening 7163 in the base 7161, the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the pillar screen 710 is brought closer to the rotation axis 722 so that the two are as coaxial as possible, and the rotation balance is suppressed from becoming unbalanced. doing.

The quantity and installation location of the weight members 7326 and 7366, the quantity and formation location of the rib group 7126, the size and formation location of the opening 7163, and the like may be appropriately adjusted.

Further, in the pillar screen 710, the cylindrical portion 707 and the rotary gear mechanism 740 are present on the right side surface (right base 732), while these are not present on the left side surface (left base 736), so that the pillar screen 710 is not present. Torsional stress is applied to each screen member 712,714,716 when trying to rotate. In particular, the torsional stress applied to the first screen member 712 whose projection surface is flat is considered to be remarkable. In this respect, in the present embodiment, as described above, the flat panel base 7125 is provided as the base of the flat panel 7121, and the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125, so that the rigidity is increased. .. That is, the rib group 7126 has a function of suppressing the rotation balance from becoming unbalanced and a function of increasing the rigidity.

Attached to the back surface of the first screen member 712 (more specifically, the back surface of the flat panel base 7125) at both ends in the longitudinal direction and at the end on the side that joins the third screen member 716. Demarcating ribs 7122 are formed (see, eg, FIGS. 36-41). The mounting demarcation rib 7122 has a triangular shape that closes the side surface of the column screen 710 by adjoining the short side portions 7322, 7362 of each base 732 and 736. Therefore, when closing the right side surface of the pillar screen 710 in front view with the right base 732, the orientation of the right base 732 can be easily determined only by adjoining the mounting demarcation rib 7122 and the short side portion 7322. When the left side surface of the pillar screen 710 in front view is closed by the left base 736, the orientation of the left base 736 is defined only by adjoining the mounting defining rib 7122 and the short side portion 7362.

Since the mounting demarcation rib 7122 has a function of improving workability when the side surface of the pillar screen 710 is closed by the right base 732 and the left base 736, it is formed if the function can be maintained. The place and shape of the screen are not limited. For example, such mounting demarcation ribs 7122 are formed on the back surface of the third screen member 716 at both ends in the longitudinal direction and at the ends on the side that joins the first screen member 712. Is also good. Further, a part of the mounting demarcation rib 7122 is formed on the back surface of the first screen member 712, and a part of the mounting demarcation rib 7122 on the back surface of the third screen member 716 is formed to form the first screen member 712. When the third screen member 716 is joined, the mounting demarcation rib 7122 adjacent to the short side portion 7322 of the right base 732 and the short side portion 7362 of the left base 736 may be formed. Further, the mounting demarcation rib 7122 may be formed at the joint portion between the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714, or the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 may be formed. The mounting demarcation rib 7122 may be formed at the joint. Furthermore, the shape of the right base 732 and the left base 736 does not have to be trapezoidal, and if the orientation of the right base and the left base can be defined by adjoining a positioning member such as the mounting defining rib 7122, the right base, The shapes of the left base and the positioning member are not limited to a specific shape, and the number is not limited to one and may be two.

In the rotary gear mechanism 740, the large-diameter gear 742 and the gear-shaped portion 744 having a diameter smaller than that of the large-diameter gear 742 are integrally formed, and the cylindrical portion 707 is coaxial with the rotating shaft 722 of the column screen 710. It is fixed to.

The large-diameter gear 742 has teeth formed over the entire circumference at a pitch of 5 degrees, and the gear-shaped portion 744 has protrusions 7442 that project outward in the radial direction at a pitch of 10 degrees. That is, 72 teeth of 742 of the large-diameter gear 7 are formed at substantially equal intervals over the entire circumference, and 36 protrusions 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 are formed at substantially equal intervals over the entire circumference. However, the pitch of the teeth of the large-diameter gear 742 and the pitch of the protrusion 7442 formed on the gear shape portion 744 are not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate. The function of the gear shape portion 744 will be described later.

(2) Screen Driven Base, Fixed Base and Upper Base The screen driven base, fixed base and upper base will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

The screen drive base (left screen drive base 702 and right screen drive base 704) supports the rotating shaft 722 on both the left and right sides, and also supports the movable screen unit 700, the fixed base 708, and the upper base 706 on both the left and right sides. There is. More specifically, the left and right ends of the fixed base 708 and the upper base 706 are fixed by the left screen drive base 702 and the right screen drive base 704, and the movable screen unit 700 is provided in the internal space of the assembly of the plurality of bases. Is stored.

The fixed base 708 is located below the movable screen unit 700, and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is formed in a curved shape so as not to hinder the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. At the front end of the fixed base 708, a rectangular lower screen 7082 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is provided. The lower screen 7082 functions as a projection surface on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed together with any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 of each screen member 712,714,716. That is, one projection surface (projection surface) is formed by any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 of each screen member 712, 714, 716 and the lower screen 7082. However, the lower screen 7082 does not move (rotate) like the movable screen unit 700 (pillar screen 710), and functions as a fixed screen on which image light is projected from the projector 213.

There are a plurality of undulations on the surface of the lower screen 7082, which is a curved surface that curves in the front-rear direction. As a result, the image projected on the lower screen 7082 can also have a three-dimensional effect. However, the present invention does not mean to exclude the lower screen 7082 having a flat shape.

The upper base 706 has a substantially L-shaped long cross section across the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction), and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is curved so as not to hinder the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. It is formed.

(3) Drive Mechanism The configuration of the drive mechanism 815 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the right screen drive base 704 and the drive mechanism 815. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit 700 as viewed from the right side. However, in FIG. 46, the motor base 816, the motor 812, and the stopper mechanism 790, which will be described later, are not shown.

The drive mechanism 815 is provided on the right screen drive base 704, and the movable screen unit 700 (for example, see FIG. 33) is rotated forward or reverse with the rotation shaft 722 (for example, see FIG. 33) as the center of rotation. , The projection surface on which the image light projected from the projector 213 is displayed (projected) can be switched. In the present embodiment, the clockwise rotation of the movable screen unit 700 when viewed from the right side is a forward rotation (rotation in the direction in which the pillar screen 710 moves from the bottom to the top when viewed from the front), and is counterclockwise. Rotation around is defined as reverse rotation (rotation in the direction in which the pillar screen 710 moves from top to bottom in front view).

The drive mechanism 815 mainly includes a motor 812 as a drive source for rotating the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 33), a reduction mechanism 818, and an intermediate gear 820.

The motor 812 is a stepping motor having a drive shaft 814, and is attached to the right screen drive base 704 via the motor base 816 and the mechanism cover 810 described later. Further, gear groups such as the reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 are covered with the mechanism cover 810.

The reduction mechanism 818 has a reduction gear 8182 and a driven gear 8184, and is rotatably supported by the right screen drive base 704 via a bearing 819. Further, the intermediate gear 820 is rotatably supported by the right screen drive base 704 via a bearing 821.

A motor base 816 to which the motor 812 is attached is assembled to the mechanism cover 810. The rotation shaft (drive shaft 814) of the motor penetrates the mechanism cover 810 and meshes with the driven gear 8184 to rotate the reduction gear 8182. The reduction gear 8182 meshes with the intermediate gear 820, and the intermediate gear 820 meshes with the large diameter gear 742 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 of the right base 732 (see, for example, FIG. 37). The right screen drive base 704 is provided with a case area 830 for accommodating the rotary gear mechanism 740.

A lower notch 832 is formed diagonally to the lower right of the case region 830, and the large-diameter gear 742 is partially exposed to the lower notch 832 and meshes with the intermediate gear 820. Therefore, when the motor 812 rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 rotates via the reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 based on the rotation of the drive shaft 814. The large-diameter gear 742 is a movable screen unit when the right base 732 (for example, see FIGS. 36 and 37) to which the large-diameter gear 742 is fixed is rotated via a cylindrical portion 707 (see, for example, FIG. 37). The 700 rotates about the rotation shaft 722 (axis).

Here, the sub-control board 72 outputs a motor drive control signal to the drive driver of the motor 812, and controls the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the drive shaft 814. An upper notch 834 is formed in the upper part of the case region 830, and a part of the rotary gear mechanism 740 is exposed here. Then, as will be described in detail later, the stopper mechanism 790, which will be described later, engages with the gear-shaped portion 744 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 via the upper notch 834, and prevents the movable screen unit 700 from rotating to the current position. It can be fastened.

(4) Rotation axis FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken from above when the projected block 203 is cut in the horizontal direction so as to include the rotation axis 722. The left end of the rotating shaft 722 penetrates the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 and is fixed to the boss portion 739A of the left screen drive base 702. The right end of the rotating shaft 722 penetrates the center of the right base 732 (right base center hole 735) and the center of the rotating gear mechanism 740 and is fixed to the right screen drive base 704. The rotary shaft 722 is supported by the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 via the left bearing 852, and is supported by the center hole 7402 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 via the right bearing 724. As a result, the movable screen unit 700 can rotate forward or reverse with the rotation shaft 722 as the center (axis).

A coil spring 725 is provided at the left end of the rotating shaft 722. The coil spring 725 is built in the case body 854. The left end of the case body 854 does not abut on the boss portion 739A, but the right end abuts on the left bearing 852, whereby a certain distance can be maintained between the left base 736 and the left screen drive base 702. , The left base 736 can be prevented from coming into contact with the left screen drive base 702. In addition, the coil spring 725 absorbs backlash in the left-right direction.

(5) Stopper Mechanism The configuration of the stopper mechanism 790 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the right side surface of the projected block 203 as viewed from the front side. In FIG. 48, the right screen drive base 704 is not shown. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is not blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. 51 is an enlarged view of part X shown in FIG. 50.

The stopper mechanism 790 includes a solenoid 792 that can operate in the vertical direction and a stopper 794 that moves up and down with the vertical movement of the solenoid 792. The solenoid 792 and the stopper 794 are housed in the case body 796, and then the stopper mechanism 790 is provided. It is attached to the right screen drive base 704.

In the solenoid 792, the plunger 7922 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50) is located upward when the coil is energized, and the plunger 7922 is directed downward when the coil is de-energized and becomes non-excited. Operates (falls).

The stopper 794 is provided below the main body 7942 and the main body 7942 connected so as to be able to move up and down with the vertical movement of the solenoid 792 (plunger 7922), and is provided with the vertical movement of the main body 7942. It has a stopper pin 7944 that moves up and down.

The stopper mechanism 790 is arranged directly above the gear shape portion 744. More specifically, the stopper mechanism 790 is arranged so that the stopper pin 7944 can move forward and backward with respect to the gear shape portion 744.

The sub-control board 72 sets the projection surface (any of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167) on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed to another projection surface (any of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167). When changing to the projection plane), the motor 812 is driven to rotate the movable screen unit 700. Then, almost at the same time when the movable screen unit 700 is stopped at the target position, the sub-control board 72 puts the solenoid 792 in a non-excited state and sets the stopper pin 7944 to the gear shape portion 744 inside the diameter of the gear shape portion 744. Advance in the direction (downward). When the stopper pin 7944 that has advanced to the gear shape portion 744 engages with the groove 7444 between one protrusion 7442 and another protrusion 7442 adjacent to the one protrusion 7442, the movable screen unit 700 Rotation is blocked. In this way, the sub-control board 72 can stop the movable screen unit 700 at a desired rotation position.

By the way, the stopper mechanism 790 has a knob 795 that can manually move the stopper pin 7944 up and down. Therefore, even if the position shift occurs when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the stopper pin 7944 that has advanced with respect to the gear shape portion 744 can be retracted by moving the knob 795 upward. When the stopper pin 7944 retracts from the gear shape portion 744, the movable screen unit 700 can be manually rotated, so that the above-mentioned misalignment can be corrected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the stopper pin 7944 is cut (chamfered) so that the corner portion of the tip portion is tapered toward the tip portion. As a result, even if the stopper 794 is caught in the middle of the advance and the advance is incomplete, if the protrusion 7442 acts on the stopper pin 7944 due to the rotation of the gear shape portion 744, the stopper pin 7944 can be easily operated. It will be pushed upward, and it will be possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction of the movable screen unit 700. Further, in addition to this, the tip of the protrusion 7442 of the gear shape portion 744 is also cut so as to taper toward the tip. Therefore, when the stopper 794 advances to the gear shape portion 744, it is possible to prevent the stopper 794 from being caught in the middle of the process until the stopper 794 engages with the groove 7444.

Further, the protrusion 7442 of the gear shape portion 744 has an inclined portion 74421 that is inclined so as to bulge in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) from the base end portion toward the tip end portion. That is, the groove 7444 between the one protrusion 7442 and the other protrusion 7442 adjacent to the one protrusion has a bowl shape in which the width in the circumferential direction decreases from the radial inner side to the radial outer side. ing. Therefore, once the stopper pin 7944 engages with the groove 7444, even if the stopper pin 7944 acts on the stopper pin 7944 from the protrusion 7442, it is possible to prevent the stopper pin 7944 from being easily pushed upward.

As described above, the protrusion 7442 of the gear shape portion 744 has an inclined portion 74421 that inclines so as to bulge in the circumferential direction from the base end portion toward the tip end portion, and the stopper pin 7944 is shown in FIG. As described above, the portion extending above the cut tip portion extends in the substantially vertical direction without being inclined. Therefore, when the stopper pin 7944 and the protrusion 7442 come into contact with each other, the corner portion 74422 formed at the radial outer end of the inclined portion 74421 of the protrusion 7442 and the stopper pin 7944 come into contact with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an inclined portion may be formed on the side surface of the stopper pin 7944 (the surface that comes into contact with the protrusion 7442) so that the stopper pin 7944 and the protrusion 7442 come into contact with each other. ..

(6) Optical Sensor Unit The configuration of the optical sensor unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45, 46, and 52. FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit viewed from the right side, and is a view showing the optical sensor unit 800 so that it can be visually recognized. The optical sensor unit 800 detects the position of the rotating movable screen unit 700 in the rotation direction, and is an optical sensor that uses an optical sensor to block the optical path between the light emitting element and the light receiving element of the optical sensor. Is which, and the position is detected based on the timing at which the optical path is blocked.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the optical sensor unit 800, three optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 are arranged radially at equal angle intervals on the right screen drive base 704. The optical sensor 802 detects that the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is located in front, and the optical sensor 804 detects that the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is located in front. Is detected, and the optical sensor 806 detects that the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 is located in front of the screen member 716. The optical sensor unit 800 is inserted and fixed in a radial groove 801 formed on the end surface of the case region 830 of the rotary gear mechanism 740 of the right screen drive base 704. That is, each optical sensor does not rotate with respect to the rotating movable screen unit 700.

On the end surface of the rotary gear mechanism 740 provided on the right base 732 (see, for example, FIG. 36), a small arc-shaped light-shielding piece 791 is projected at a right angle toward the optical sensor unit 800 side. The shading piece 791 has a width (length) of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The light-shielding piece 791 blocks the optical paths of the three optical sensors 802, 804, 806 in order in the process of moving the light-shielding piece 791 by the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. When the light-shielding piece 791 passes between the light-emitting element and the light-receiving element, the optical path is blocked. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 that monitors the detection signal from the optical sensor determines which optical sensor the light-shielding piece 791 reaches. Can be determined. As described above, since the three optical sensors 802, 804, 806 correspond to the screen members 712, 714, 716, the sub-control board 72 in the rotation direction depends on which optical sensor the light-shielding piece 791 blocks. The position of the movable screen unit 700 can be determined.

Further, when one end of the shading piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches one of the optical sensors (the optical sensor of any one of the optical sensors 802, 804 and 806), the tip of the screen appears on the front side. When the other end of the shading piece separates from the optical sensor and the other end of the screen retracts from the front side, the sub-control board 72 is based on the output timing of the optical sensor and the number of pulses of the motor drive signal. , It is possible to accurately determine where the screen is located. As a result, the sub-control board 72 can accurately project the video light onto the screen, and the video light can be changed according to the position of the screen.

Further, as described above, the shading piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. The rotation stop control of the movable screen unit 700 by the sub-control board 72 is such that one end of the shading piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor (the optical sensor of any one of the optical sensors 802, 804 and 806). However, the length of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction is a length that takes into consideration the time required for the movable screen unit 700 to decelerate and actually stop. In the present embodiment, since the length of the light-shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction, this is performed in response to the fact that one end of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor. Even so, the movable screen unit 700 is placed at a specified position with a margin (for example, a position where the light-shielding piece 791 is rotated about 25 degrees in the same direction after one end of the light-shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor (for example, the light-shielding piece 791). It is possible to control the stop at almost the center position)). Further, if the light-shielding piece 791 does not block the optical sensor when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the sub-control board 72 determines that the misalignment has occurred and prompts the correction of the misalignment. it can. Therefore, even if a trouble such as a misalignment occurs, the misalignment can be corrected immediately, so that it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a higher visual image effect than before.

(7) Explanation of Operation of Movable Screen Unit 700 The operation of the movable screen unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. 53 is a view in which the front view and the right side view of the projected block 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 faces the front. FIG. 54 is a view in which the front view and the right side view of the projected block 203 are arranged side by side, and the end portion on the long side side of the first screen member 712 and the end portion on the long side side of the second screen member 714. It is the figure when the joint part (corner part of a triangular prism) with a part faces the front. FIG. 55 is a view in which the front view and the right side view of the projected block 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 faces the front.

When the motor 812 (see, for example, FIG. 45) rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 provided on the right base 732 rotates due to the operation of each member constituting the drive mechanism 815, and the movable screen unit 700 is centered on the rotation shaft 722. Rotate.

The sub-control board 72 can operate the movable screen unit 700 according to the gaming state. For example, in a general gaming state (for example, a non-ART gaming state, etc.), the movable screen unit 700 is maintained stopped with the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 facing the front, which is more advantageous than the general gaming state. In a high notification game state (for example, an ART game state), the movable screen unit 700 is maintained stopped while the second screen member 714 is facing the front, and the special notification game state is more advantageous than the notification game state. In (for example, a special zone or the like), the movable screen unit 700 can be kept stopped with the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 facing the front.

Then, when the gaming state shifts to another gaming state, the sub-control board 72 controls the movable screen unit 700 to rotate so that the projection surface on which the image projected by the projector 213 is projected faces the front. Run.

When the movable screen unit 700 is rotated, the sub-control board 72 continuously projects the image projected from the projector 213, so that the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 can be visually recognized from the front. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the image projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be visually recognized.

The sub-control board 72 can project an image corresponding to the projected projection surface (an image according to the game state) as an image projected from the projector 213. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, it is advantageous when the image projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be visually recognized. Images of a plurality of gaming states having different degrees can be visually recognized at the same time.

Further, the sub-control board 72 is in a gaming state by performing an effect of rattling the movable screen unit 700 (for example, an effect of quickly and repeatedly operating forward rotation and reverse rotation, hereinafter referred to as "rattling effect"). It is possible to perform an effect that makes us expect whether or not the transition will occur. In particular, in the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the shading piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. In the case of a triangular prism, it is necessary to rotate the movable screen unit 700 from one projection plane to another projection plane by about 120 degrees. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 can perform the effect of rotating the movable screen unit 700 in the forward and reverse directions within a range of approximately 70 degrees.

For example, when the right end of the shading piece 791 illuminates the optical sensor 804, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be visually recognized, but the projection surface 7141 is better than the projection surface 7123. It is in a state where it is easy to see. Further, when the left end of the shading piece 791 illuminates the optical sensor 802, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be visually recognized from the front, but the projection surface 7123 is better than the projection surface 7141. It is in a state where it is easy to see. Therefore, the rattling effect is produced by changing the easily visible projection surface of the two projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141) according to the degree of expectation of transition of the gaming state, thereby producing a highly interesting effect. be able to. For example, when it is determined that the sub-control board 72 shifts from the general gaming state to the notification gaming state, the sub-control board 72 frequently produces rattling in an angle range in which the projection surface 7141 is easier to see than the projection surface 7123. When it is not decided to shift from the general gaming state to the notification gaming state, the projection surface 7123 is more frequently seen than the projection surface 7141 by performing a rattling effect in an angle range that is easier to see. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

By the way, since the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected by the reflection mirror 237 (see FIG. 7) arranged in the front upper part, it is projected at a predetermined angle toward the projection surface. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, when the corners of the triangular prism are facing the front, shadows are likely to be formed according to the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface. In particular, the projection planes 7141 and 7167 are remarkable because the projection planes are not flat but have a three-dimensional shape. Further, even when the corners of the triangular prism are not facing the front, since the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape, when the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface, it becomes a shadow. Shadow areas may be formed where the image is not projected. The shaded area formed in this way can be generated even if some kind of image light is projected from the projector 213. For example, it may be possible to project image light from the projector 213 so that a shaded area is formed, but such an image can be projected from the projector 213 because the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape of a convex portion or a concave portion. By using the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface without projecting light, it is possible to perform an effect using a shaded area. The effect using the shaded area is, for example, a hidden image effect in which the image showing the expected degree is hidden by projecting the image light indicating the expected degree of the game state from the projector 213 to the area where the shaded area is formed. It can be carried out. Then, by performing a rattling effect while performing a hidden image effect, it is possible to perform an effect in which an image indicating the degree of expectation can be seen or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the present invention, both the terms "projection region" and "projection plane" are used, but both the terms "projection region" and "projection plane" are used in two dimensions and three dimensions. This is to distinguish between. That is, one is a two-dimensional concept, and the other is a three-dimensional concept including a three-dimensional shape. Here, the "projection area" may be two-dimensional and the "projection surface" may be three-dimensional, or the "projection area" may be three-dimensional and the "projection surface" may be two-dimensional. For example, if the "projection area" is "a three-dimensional shape on which the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected", the "projection surface" is "when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed from the front". It becomes a "two-dimensional image". Further, if the "projection area" is "a two-dimensional image when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed from the front", the "projection surface" is a solid on which the image projected from the projector 213 is projected. "Shape".

(8) Image example projected on the projection surface 7141 and the projection surface 7167 FIG. 56 is a diagram showing (A) an image example projected on the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and (B) a third screen. It is a figure which shows the image example projected on the projection surface 7161 of a member 716.

In FIG. 56 (A), since the projection surface 7141 has a concave shape, an image having a sense of depth is projected on the projection surface 7141. Further, in FIG. 56 (B), the book is shaped as a three-dimensional object, and the image projected from the projector 213 projects an image as if the pages of the book are turned over, thereby producing a highly realistic effect. It can be performed.

Even when any of the projection planes including the projection plane 7123 is facing the front, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, any one of the projection planes of the movable screen unit 700 (projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). ) And the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane. Here, the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 is variable by rotating the movable screen unit 700, as described above. On the other hand, the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is a projection plane that can always be projected without operation. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 forms one projection plane on both the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 (any of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) and the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708. However, with the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 fixed, it is possible to perform an effect of changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700.

For example, the sub-control board 72 projects information images such as credit data and BET number display that are not related to the result of the internal lottery on the lower screen 7082, and the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery is projected on the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700. It can be projected onto (any of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). Further, the sub-control board 72 may, for example, display the navigation of the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R (see, for example, FIG. 2) on the undulating portion of the lower screen 7082 that functions as a fixed screen. In this way, by using the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082 that functions as a fixed screen, the information image is always projected while changing the projected image according to the progress of the game. can do. For example, in the case of a liquid crystal display, unlike the movable screen unit 700 of the present embodiment, it does not rotate, so that it is possible to constantly display an information image by display control. However, in the case of a movable screen unit 700 such as the present embodiment in which the projection surface moves and changes by rotating, it is difficult to maintain the information image in an easily visible mode. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is formed while the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane. By changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 in a fixed state, it is possible to maintain the information image in an easily visible mode while changing the effect image.

It should be noted that while the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery is projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082, the information image not related to the result of the internal lottery is projected only on the lower screen 7082. Alternatively, both the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery and the information image not related to the result of the internal lottery may be projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082. ..

<Front panel>
FIG. 57 is a front view of the front panel 500 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view seen from above on the right side thereof. As shown in FIGS. 57 and X + 1, the front panel 500 is provided with a display device cover 30 on the front side of the front panel 500, and a front effect is provided in the area behind the display device cover 30 (inside the pachislot machine). A unit 900 is provided.

The configuration of the front effect unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view of the front effect unit 900. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the front effect unit 900.

The front effect unit 900 includes a left side light effect unit 900L, a right side light effect unit 900R, and a bottom plate 904. The bottom plate 904 has a plate shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is arranged so that the upper and lower surfaces are flat. A left light effect unit 900L and a right side light effect unit 900R are erected substantially vertically upward at both ends of the bottom plate 904 in the longitudinal direction.

Further, a left mounting member 905L is fixed to the upper end of the left light effect unit 900L, and a right mounting member 905R is fixed to the upper end of the right light effect unit 900R. A cover 906 is attached to the bottom plate 904 from below.

As described above, the front effect unit 900 is configured to have a substantially U shape, and the opening 10a of the front panel 500 (for example, FIGS. 2, 4, 4) is formed from the back surface of the front door 2a (see, for example, FIG. 2). It is attached so as to face (see 61). FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 57.

(1) Right Light Effect Unit The configuration of the right light effect unit 900R will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 69. Although there is a difference in the number of light guide plates between the left light effect unit 900L and the right side light effect unit 900R, the configurations are almost the same. Will be briefly described later. 62 and 63 are exploded perspective views of the right side light effect unit 900R, and the viewing directions are different between FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 64 is a front view of the right light effect unit 900R. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate 911, the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED substrate 922 (all of which will be described later). FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate cover 936, and the light guide plate 911. Further, FIG. 67 is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 64. FIG. 68 is a perspective view showing a state in which the LED substrate 922 and the right light guide plate subunit 910R are assembled. FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the right light effect unit 900R as seen from the direction of arrow 990 in FIG. 67.

The right light effect unit 900R realizes a predetermined light effect on the right side of the front panel 500 (see, for example, FIG. 57), and includes an LED substrate 922 on which a large number of LEDs 921 are arranged and a lens 928 described later. It includes a right-side lens subunit 912R in which light emission is produced through the light guide plate, and a right-hand light guide plate subunit 910R in which light-emitting effect is performed by the light guide plate 911 described later.

In the right light effect unit 900R, when the right light guide plate subunit 910R is tilted with respect to the right lens sub unit 912R and viewed from the player's line of sight, the right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens sub unit 912R overlap. They are arranged so that they can be seen (see, for example, FIGS. 61 and 67). Since the right light guide plate subunit 910R is arranged on the player side, the right lens sub unit 912R can be visually recognized behind the right light guide plate subunit 910R.

The right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens subunit 912R are unitized by using the same LED substrate 922.

(1-1) LED board For example, as shown in FIGS. 62, 65 to 69, the LED board 922 has a rectangular shape, so that the LEDs arranged on the LED board 922 face the front of the pachislot machine. Be placed. That is, the LED substrate 922 is arranged so that the surface on which the LED is arranged is along a two-dimensional surface including the left-right direction and the vertical direction in the front view (so as to face each other in the front view).

Further, the LED substrate 922 is provided with a large number of LEDs 921 arranged on the surface thereof for each system (details will be described later). The LED substrate 922 is housed in the LED substrate cover 920 that covers the back surface side.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the LED substrate 922, the LED 921 that guides the light to the right lens subunit 912R is arranged in the right region 9222 from the right side to the left side in the front view to about 2/3, and the rest. In the left region 9224, an LED 921 that guides the light guide plate subunit 910R to the right side is arranged. The right side region 9222 has LED rows of the first row 923A, the second row 923B, and the third row 923C from the right side to the left side in the front view, and the left side region 9224 has the LED rows from the right side to the left side in the front view. It has LED rows of 4th row 923D, 5th row 923E, and 6th row 923F.

(1-2) Right Lens Subunit As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right lens subsystem 912R has three light guide lenses 924 (right column) that conduct light from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922. The light guide lens 924A, middle row light guide lens 924B, left row light guide lens 924C) and each light guide lens 924A, 924B so as to suppress leakage of light conducting through these light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C. , 924C, a light guide lens reflector 926, and a lens 928 in which three lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and hollow cylinders are adjacently arranged in a stepped manner and integrated, and these are inserted. The lens base 930 and the lens base 930 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the three light guide lenses 924, the right row light guide lens 924A faces the LED 921 arranged in the first row 923A of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, the trabecular meshwork 925A described later). The middle row light guide lens 924B faces the LED 921 arranged in the second row 923B of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, the trabecular meshwork 925B, which will be described later, faces the LED 921), and the left row light guide lens is opposed to the LED 921. The lens 924C is arranged so as to face the LED 921 arranged in the first row 923A (FIG. 64) of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, the trabecular meshwork 925C described later faces the LED 921).

Further, the right-row light guide lens 924A is formed with a plurality of columnar small pillars 925A extending toward the LED substrate 922 along the longitudinal direction, and the middle-row light guide lens 924B is formed with a plurality of columnar columnar bodies 925A extending toward the LED substrate 922. A plurality of columnar columnar bodies 925B are formed along the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of columnar columnar columnar bodies 925C extending toward the LED substrate 922 are formed on the left column light guide lens 924C along the longitudinal direction. .. Here, since the lens 928 is a lens 928 in which three lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C are adjacent to each other and arranged in a stepped manner, the shortest length (horizontal) from each of the columnar bodies 925A, 925B, 925C to the LED substrate 922. It is a directional length, hereinafter simply referred to as "length"), but differs depending on each lens 928.

For example, the right-row light guide lens 924A arranged corresponding to the right-row lens 928A farthest from the LED substrate 922 has a small column 925B having a small column 925A having a length of another light guide lenses 924B and 924C. , Larger than 925C, the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the columnar body 925A and guided to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of the right column lens 928A. Further, the left-row light guide lens 924C arranged corresponding to the left-row lens 928C closest to the LED substrate 922 has a small pillar body 925A, 925B having a small pillar body 925C having a length of another light guide lens 924A, 924B. It is smaller, and the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the trabecular body 925C and guided to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of the left column lens 928C. Further, in the middle row light guide lens 924B arranged corresponding to the middle row lens 928B, the length of the columnar body 925B is smaller than that of the right row light guide lens 924A but larger than that of the left row light guide lens 924C. The light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the columnar body 925C and guided to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of the middle-row lens 928B.

The light from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 conducts through the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C and is emitted from the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 67, the right column lens. The 928A emits light at the position farthest from the LED substrate 922 (the position on the frontmost side), the left-row lens 928C emits light at the position closest to the LED substrate 922 (the position on the rearmost side), and the middle-row lens 928B emits light in the middle. It will emit light at the position of.

By the way, by arranging a plurality of lenses 928 in parallel in a stepped manner, the light emitting positions of the respective lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C can be changed, but on the other hand, the light emitting intensity may vary. That is, although light is supplied to the lens 928 from the LED substrate 922, the light is attenuated according to the distance from the LED substrate 922 to the lens 928, so that the right column having the largest length from the LED substrate 922. The amount of light emitted from the lens 928A may decrease, and an imbalance may occur in the light emitting intensity between the lenses 928.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C are interposed between the respective lenses 928A, 928B, 928C and the LED substrate 922, and the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C are LEDs. The light emitted from the LED 921 arranged on the substrate 922 is taken in and guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C to be emitted. In this way, while suppressing the attenuation of light by the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C, the emitted light from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C. Therefore, even if the light emitting position of the lens 928 is far from the LED 922 substrate, the light emitting intensity is not lowered. As a result, it is possible to emit light having substantially uniform emission intensity at positions different in length from the LED substrate 922, even though the light emission source is one LED substrate 922. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the light guide lens reflector 926, the right row light guide lens 924A, the middle row light guide lens 924B, and the left row light guide lens 924C are arranged in this order from the right side surface of the LED substrate 922. Each light guide lens is accommodated so as to be arranged so as to face the LED substrate 922.

In the lens base 930, the lens 928 covers the light guide lens reflector 926 and fixes them. Further, in the lens base 930, the end faces of the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C are located near the back surface of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C while the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C face the LED substrate 922. I am doing it. Each lens 928A, 928B, 928C is engraved with a pattern as if a plurality of sine waves are overlapped, and when the LED 921 emits light, the pattern corresponding to the emission color can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 911. it can.

(1-3) Right light guide plate subunit As shown in FIGS. 65 and 67, the right light guide plate subunit 910R includes a plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C on top of each other. The right light guide plate subunit 910R guides each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C when viewed from the front of the pachislot while facing the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C to the LED substrate 922. The flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C of the pachislot machines are directed from the rear to the front with respect to the LED substrate 922 so that the light plates 911A, 911B, 911C and the lens 928 appear to overlap. It is tilted so that it spreads outward (on the right side when viewed from the front).

In this way, by inclining each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 with respect to the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 use the same LED substrate 922 as a light emitting source. The lens 928 can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the 911, and a mixed effect of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C and the lens 928 is provided.

In the present embodiment, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922, but the light source is not an LED but light is diffused as compared with an LED such as a lamp. In the case of a light source, it is preferable to incline each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface in which the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. Further, even if the light source is an LED, when the LED is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable to incline the plurality of LEDs with respect to the virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, although the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 921, they are taken in from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the proximal end side (entry). It is almost parallel to the traveling direction of the light (which shines).

Further, the light guide plate 911 forms irregularities on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 in a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc., and transmits light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side along the surface. By making it (for example, when the LED 921 is lit), the above-mentioned predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. In the present embodiment, a non-transmissive treatment is performed on a specific portion of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 by, for example, hot stamping to deposit a non-transparent material (for example, a silver metal color foil). ing. As a result, when the LEDs 921 arranged to face each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 are turned on, the non-transmissive region where the hot stamping foil exists becomes three-dimensional due to the light transmitting region around it. At the same time, it is possible to create a conspicuously raised aspect.

In addition, "when the LED 921 is lit, the above-mentioned predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3" means that in normal times (for example, when the LED 921 is turned off), the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 Nothing appears in the above, and the present invention is not limited to a mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc. appear on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 at a specific time (for example, when the LED 921 is lit). For example, even in a normal state, the above-mentioned predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized by the incoming light of ambient light, and the above-mentioned predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized more clearly at a specific time. It also includes aspects such as being able to do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. are formed on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like is formed. Although it is almost invisible in the normal state by being configured with, the image may be visible at a specific time.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present specification, an image displayed indirectly or directly by a light source such as an LED is also used. Called "image". Therefore, by transmitting light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 along the surface, predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 are also included in the image. Is done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-transmissive treatment is performed by using the hot stamping foil. Instead, for example, when a thin colored metal is vapor-deposited, the portion where the metal is vapor-deposited is illuminated. It is also possible to configure the light transmitting region so that the light of the LED that transmits the metal and the light that transmits the light guide plate 911 exist.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 65, the light guide plate cover 936 accommodates three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, and each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of each light guide plate 911 is an LED substrate. It faces 922. The side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the first light guide plate 911A faces the fourth row 923D of the LED substrate 922, and the side surface 911B1 on the base end side of the second light guide plate 911B faces the fifth row 923E. The side surface 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911C faces the sixth row 923F. In this way, while the plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C overlap each other, the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are directed from the base end side to the other end side (hereinafter, referred to as "anti-base end side"). By inclining the LED board 922 so as to be separated from the LED board 922, the pattern appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C when the LED 921 arranged on the LED board 922 is lit is formed by the player. It will be visually recognized with parallax (deviation) from the viewpoint, and it will be possible to produce a three-dimensional effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A has a first circular opening 9112A on the upper end side and the proximal end side and a second circular opening on the upper end side and the anti-base end side. The holes 9114A are formed with a third circular opening 9116A on the lower end side and the proximal end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118A on the lower end side and the anti-base end side, respectively. Further, on the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B, a first circular opening 9112B is provided on the upper end side and the base end side, and a second circular opening 9114B is provided on the upper end side and the opposite base end side. A third circular opening 9116B is formed on the end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118B is formed on the lower end and the opposite base end side. Similarly, on the flat surface 911C3 of the third light guide plate 911C, a first circular opening 9112C is provided on the upper end side and the proximal end side, and a second circular opening 9114C is provided on the upper end side and the opposite proximal end side. A third circular opening 9116C is formed on the base end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118C is formed on the lower end and the opposite base end side.

Further, a locking member (upper locking member 938, upper locking member 938, which connects three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C to the upper end and the lower end of the light guide plate cover 936 with their flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 facing each other. The lower locking member 940) is attached. The upper locking member 938 is formed with a protrusion member 9382 on the base end side and a protrusion member 9384 on the anti-base end side, and the lower locking member 930 has a protrusion 9402 on the base end side and a protrusion member 9402 on the anti-base end side. Projection member 9404 is formed.

Then, the protrusion member 9382 on the base end side formed on the upper locking member 938 penetrates each of the first circular openings 9112A, 9112B, 9112C, and the protrusion member on the anti-base end side formed on the upper locking member 938. The three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected at the upper end by the 9384 penetrating the second circular openings 9114A, 9114B, and 9114C, respectively. Similarly, the base end side protrusion 9402 formed on the lower locking member 940 penetrates the third circular opening 9116A, 9116B, 9116C, respectively, and the anti-base end side protrusion formed on the lower locking member 940. The three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are connected at the lower end by the member 9404 penetrating the fourth circular opening holes 9118A, 9118B, 9118C. The three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 936. When connecting the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, a decorative cover 942 that functions as a decorative plate of the right light effect unit 900R is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 911.

The protrusion members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 have substantially the same length regardless of whether they are on the proximal end side or the anti-base end side. In this way, by making the protruding members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 penetrating the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C substantially the same, the distance between the light guide plates (horizontal length to the opposite light guide plates) can be set. Regardless, it can be suppressed to a certain length range. However, the protrusion members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 do not necessarily have to have substantially the same length. For example, the length of the protrusion member 9382 on the proximal end side and the length of the projection member 9384 on the opposite proximal end side are different. Similarly, the length of the protrusion member 9402 on the proximal end side and the length of the projection member 9404 on the anti-base end side may be different.

The upper and lower ends of the light guide plate cover 936 are connected to the lens base 930 by a cover mounting member 923, 934 (see, for example, FIG. 62), and the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 are integrally opposed to the LED substrate 922. Be placed.

By the way, if each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 is perpendicular to each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, the LED 921 and the light guide plate 911 arranged on the LED substrate 922 A predetermined angle is generated between the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the LED 921, and the light from the LED 921 cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate 911.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are cut so as to form a surface facing the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 921 is configured to be incident substantially perpendicular to each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the proximal end side.

By the way, if the light incident on the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is diffused without going straight, there is a problem that the image that should appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 does not appear clearly. May occur. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 described above are cut so that a surface facing the LED 921 is formed. As a result, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be increased, and the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922, and the light guide plates 911 are flat. It is possible to make the image clearly appear on the surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 69, an open region is formed between the lens 928 and the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C on the side opposite to the LED substrate 922 side. 980 is formed. Then, in this open area 980, various light effects can be performed.

The inner wall (reflecting member) 914L, 914R (see, for example, FIGS. 57 and 58) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 are inclined in the same direction as the inclination direction of the light guide plate on the front side of the LED substrate 922. It is possible to function as a mirror-finished reflective surface. That is, when the light emitted from the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 enters the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 of the light guide plate 911, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are preliminarily applied. Images such as patterns and characters appear. The images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are reflected by the inner wall 914R that functions as a reflecting surface and reach the player's field of view. A part of the light emitted from the lens 928 is also reflected and reaches the player's field of view. In this case, the player directly visually recognizes the light emitted from the lens 928 and / or the image appearing on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, and visually recognizes the image reflected by the inner surface wall 914R and the like. In combination with what you do, you can be conscious of the effect that the image of light is doubled.

Further, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are not perpendicular to the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, but are flat. The surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 are cut so that the angle formed between the front and back surfaces (the surface on the player side) is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 67). As described above, since the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side are also cut, the cross section seen when these light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are cut in the horizontal direction is shown in FIG. 67, for example. Of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3, the back surface (the surface on the lens 928 side) is the upper bottom, and the front surface (the surface on the player side) is the lower bottom.

In this way, between the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C on the anti-base end side and the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. By cutting so that the angle formed by the light guide plate 911 is sharp, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 911 (player). From the side, each flat surface of the light guide plate 911 can be recognized only as a linear shape along the end on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 911), and the player's consciousness is recognized by the flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. You can gaze at the image that appears. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a party to the pachislot game, it is expected that the pachislot is in an advantageous state, for example, by using the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 of the light guide plate 911. It is possible to appeal that it is in a high degree state. Among them, when a plurality of light guide plates 911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side are substantially flush with each other, the light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are located on the anti-base end side. Since the thickness of each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 becomes thick and thick light is emitted, it is possible to strongly appeal to the above-mentioned third party. Further, since the light emitted from the lens 928 can be visually recognized even in the open region 980, the effect is great. In particular, in a game machine in which an effect image is displayed by projecting the image light projected from the projector 213, the projected image becomes blurred when the vicinity of the screen is brightened, so it is necessary to make the vicinity of the screen a dark place. Then, it becomes difficult to provide a light emitting means in the vicinity of the screen, and the appealing power to a third party tends to be weakened, so that the effect is remarkable.

When a plurality of light guide plates are stacked and arranged as in the present embodiment, the ends of the light guide plates on the opposite side to the base end side are all cut at the same angle to visually recognize the end portions. It is preferable in that it has a strong appeal to a third party who can do it, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a light guide plate cut at one angle and a light guide plate cut at another angle are placed on top of each other, a person who is within a visible range of the end of the light guide plate cut at one angle. And, it is possible to appeal to both a person who is in a visible range at the end of the light guide plate cut at another angle, and the range that can be appealed to a third party is widened.

Further, in the present embodiment, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are formed on the front surface (player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. It is cut so that the angle formed with the surface) is an acute angle, but instead of this, it may be cut so that it is an obtuse angle. In this case, the light emission from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 911 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Together with this, it is possible to create a production that enhances the interest of the player.

Further, the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 911 can be arbitrarily determined, but if the emission color is a warm color or a rainbow color, it becomes more It is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65, of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, for the third light guide plate 911C, each LED 921 arranged on the side surface 911A1 on the base end side and in the sixth row 923F. A projecting body 956 for guiding light was provided to allow light from the light to enter. The projecting body 956 has a comb-teeth shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs in the sixth row 923F.

As shown in FIG. 68, each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is housed in the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED substrate is such that the projecting body 956 and the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 face each other. It is assembled with 922. The light guide plate cover 936 is provided with a partition wall 937 that partitions each projecting body 956, and the partition wall 937 prevents the light emitted from the LED 921 facing the adjacent projecting body 956 from entering. It has a function. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light entering from the projecting body 956 of the third light guide plate 911C from mixing with each other among the plurality of LEDs 921. Further, since the projecting body 956 for the light guide plate and the light guide plate 911C are integrally molded, the light entering region to the light guide plate (for example, is compared with that of a separate body from the light guide plate such as a diffusion lens). , The region of α shown in FIG. 66) can be reduced, and the effect region of the light guide plate 911C (for example, the region of β shown in FIG. 66) can be increased accordingly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, when three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are arranged in an overlapping manner, a space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is provided on the proximal end side (LED substrate). It is widest on the 922 side) and gradually narrows toward the anti-base end side (opposite side to the LED substrate 922).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, on the front and back surfaces of the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A, which faces the second light guide plate 911B (player side), the first circle. The first rib 9113A, the second rib 9115A, respectively, on the peripheral edge of the opening 9112A, the peripheral edge of the second circular opening 9114A, the peripheral edge of the third circular opening 9116A, and the peripheral edge of the fourth circular opening 9118A, respectively. A third rib 9117A and a fourth rib 9119A are provided. Each of these ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, 9119A has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the anti-base end side (see, for example, FIG. 67).

Similarly, on the front and back surfaces of the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C (player side), the peripheral portion of the first circular opening 9112B, the second circle. The first rib 9113B, the second rib 9115B, the third rib 9117B, and the fourth rib 9119B are provided on the peripheral edge of the opening 9114B, the peripheral edge of the third circular opening 9116B, and the peripheral edge of the fourth circular opening 9118B, respectively. It is provided. Each of these ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B has an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the anti-base end side (see, for example, FIG. 67).

When the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected, the ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, and 9119A provided on the first light guide plate 911A form the flat surfaces 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B facing each other. Contact. Similarly, the ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B provided on the second light guide plate 911B abut on the flat surface 911C3 of the facing third light guide plate 911C. In this way, when the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the flat surfaces of the light guide plates facing each other with ribs in contact with each other and then fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the flat surfaces of the light guide plates are connected to each other. The space is widest on the base end side and gradually narrows toward the anti-base end side.

In this way, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plates widest on the proximal end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 921 arranged in the adjacent row from entering. For example, the light emitted from the LED 921 arranged in the fourth row 923D enters the side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the first light guide plate 911A, and is arranged in, for example, the third row 923C or the fifth row 923E. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 921 from entering. Further, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the anti-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to a third party can be enhanced. it can. Further, since the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the light guide plates facing each other by abutting the ribs and fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the stability when transporting the pastillo is improved. It exerts the effect of being excellent.

The space between one light guide plate and the other adjacent light guide plates is set to be the widest on the proximal end side (LED substrate 922 side) and on the anti-base end side (opposite side to the LED substrate 922). The mode of gradually narrowing toward the base end side is not limited to the above-mentioned mode in which a rib having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the proximal end side to the anti-base end side is provided. For example, a boss on the proximal end side and a boss on the anti-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B, and the boss is more base than the boss on the anti-base end side. The height of the boss on the end side (the shortest distance to the flat surface of the opposing second light guide plate 911B) may be increased. Similarly, a boss on the proximal end side and a boss on the anti-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C, rather than the boss on the anti-base end side. The height of the boss on the base end side may be increased. Further, of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the flat surface of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B is inclined downward from the proximal end side toward the anti-base end side. A rib having an inclined surface is provided, and the flat surface of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C has a height smaller than that of the boss on the proximal end side and the boss on the proximal end side. A boss on the anti-base end side may be provided.

(2) Left Light Effect Unit The left light effect unit 900L will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. 70 is a front view of the left light effect unit 900L, FIG. 71 is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 70, and FIG. 72 shows a light guide plate 1911, a light guide plate cover 1936, and an LED substrate 1922 (all of which are). It is an exploded perspective view (described later).

As described above, the configuration of the left light effect unit 900L is substantially the same as that of the right side light effect unit 900R, and therefore, a brief description will be given here.

The left side light effect unit 900L realizes a predetermined light effect together with the right side light effect unit 900R on the left side of the front panel 500 (see, for example, FIG. 57), and is an LED substrate 1922 in which a large number of LEDs are arranged. The left lens subunit subunit 912L, which produces light emission through the lens 1928, and the left light guide plate subunit 910L, which produces light emission effect by the light guide plate 1911 described later, are provided.

(2-1) LED board The LED board 1922 has a rectangular shape like the LED board 922, and the LEDs arranged on the LED board 1922 are arranged so as to face the front of the pachislot machine. That is, the LED substrate 1922 is arranged so that the surface on which the LED is arranged is along a two-dimensional surface including the left-right direction and the vertical direction in the front view (so as to face each other in the front view).

Further, the LED substrate 1922 is provided with a large number of LEDs arranged on the surface thereof for each system. The LED substrate 1922 is housed in an LED substrate cover (not shown) that covers the back surface side.

Further, the LED substrate 1922 has an LED row in which LEDs (not shown) are arranged in the vertical direction like the LED substrate 922, but the number of rows is one less than that of the LED substrate 922. .. This is because the number of light guide plates 1911 described later is one less.

The other configurations of the LED substrate 1922 are substantially the same as those of the LED substrate 922, and the description thereof will be omitted.

(2-2) Left Lens Subunit The left lens subsystem 912L has three light guide lenses 1924 (left row light guide lens 1924A, middle row light guide lens 1924B) that conduct light from LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922. , Right column light guide lens 1924C) and a light guide lens reflector 1926 that can accommodate each light guide lens 1924A, 1924B, 1924C so as to suppress leakage of light conducting through these light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C. A lens 1928 in which three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and hollow cylinders are arranged in parallel in a stepped manner and integrated, and a lens base 1930 that inserts and supports them are provided. ..

Each of the three light guide lenses 1924 is arranged so as to face the LEDs arranged in the LED row of the LED substrate 1922.

Further, each of the row light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C is formed with a plurality of columnar columnar bodies (not shown) extending toward the LED substrate 1922 along the longitudinal direction. Here, since the lens 1928 has three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C arranged side by side in a stepped manner adjacent to each other, it is the shortest length (horizontal length) from each columnar body to the LED substrate 1922. , Hereinafter, simply referred to as “length”), but differ depending on each lens 1928. It should be noted that these small pillars can conduct the light from the LED 1921 to each small pillar and guide the light to the immediate vicinity of the back surface of each lens 1928.

The light from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922 conducts through the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C and is emitted from the lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C, so that the left column lens 1928A is the farthest from the LED substrate 1922. The right-row lens 1928C emits light at the position (farthest position), the right-row lens 1928C emits light at the position closest to the LED substrate 1922 (farthest position), and the middle-row lens 1928B emits light at an intermediate position. ..

Similar to the right lens subsystem 912R, the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C suppress the light attenuation, and the light emitted from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922 is emitted from the respective lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C. By guiding the lens to the vicinity of the back surface, the light emission intensity does not decrease even if the light emission position of the lens 1928 is far from the LED substrate. As a result, it is possible to emit light having substantially uniform emission intensity at positions different in length from the LED substrate 1922, even though the light emission source is a single LED substrate.

Further, the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C are also housed in the light guide lens reflector 1926.

The lens base 1930 fixes the lens 1928 so as to cover the light guide lens reflector 1926. Further, in the lens base 1930, the end faces of the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C are located near the back surface of the lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C while the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C face each other with the LED substrate 1922. I am doing it. Each lens 1928A, 1928B, 1928C is engraved with a pattern as if a plurality of sine waves are overlapped, and when the LED emits light, the pattern corresponding to the emission color can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 1911. it can.

(2-3) Left light guide plate subunit The left light guide plate subunit 910L includes a plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on top of each other. The left light guide plate subunit 910L has light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, respectively, when viewed from the front of the pachislot while facing the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B to the LED substrate 1922. The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are spread out from the rear to the front of the LED substrate 1922 toward the outside of the pachislot machine (left side when viewed from the front) so that the lens 1928 and the lens 1928 appear to overlap each other. It is arranged at an angle.

In this way, by inclining the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 with respect to the LED substrate 1922, the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 use the same LED substrate 1922 as a light emitting source, and the light guide plate 1911 The lens 1928 is made visible through the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3, so that the mixed effect of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B and the lens 1928 is provided.

The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are also inclined with respect to the LED substrate 1922, but when the light source is not an LED but a light source such as a lamp in which light is diffused as compared with the LED. It is preferable to incline each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface in which the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. Further, even if the light source is an LED, if the LEDs are arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 may be inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable to incline the plurality of LEDs with respect to the virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, although the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED, the light taken in (entered) from the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the proximal end side. Is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of.

Further, the light guide plate 1911 forms irregularities on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 in a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc., and allows light to pass along the surface from the end portion, for example, when the LED is lit. The engraved predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. are made to appear on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. In the present embodiment, a non-transmissive treatment is performed on a specific portion of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 by, for example, hot stamping to deposit a non-transmissive material (for example, a silver metal color foil). .. As a result, when the LEDs arranged to face each of the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 1911 are turned on, the non-transmissive region where the hot stamping foil exists is three-dimensionally and by the light transmitting region around it. It is possible to create a prominently raised aspect.

In addition, "when the LED is lit, a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc. engraved appear on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, 1911C3" means that in normal times (for example, when the LED is turned off), it is on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3. Nothing appears, and the present invention is not limited to a mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc. appear on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 at a specific time (for example, when the LED is lit). For example, even in normal times, the engraved predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. can be visually recognized by the incoming light of ambient light, and the engraved predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, etc. can be made clearer at a specific time. It also includes an aspect in which it becomes visible.

Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined shape, pattern, characters, etc. are engraved on each light guide plate 1911, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an image is usually composed of a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like. Although it is almost invisible at the time, the image may be visible at a specific time.

Further, the shapes, patterns, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are different from the shapes, patterns, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Therefore, when the LED is turned on, different images appear on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, although they have the same motif as the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3 and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

However, the image appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 when the LED is turned on may be the same as the image appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

Further, in the present embodiment, for any of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 and the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, a specific portion is subjected to, for example, hot stamping to a non-transmissive material (for example, silver). Although the non-transmissive treatment for depositing (metal color foil) is performed, it is not always necessary to perform the non-transmissive treatment on the flat surfaces of all the light guide plates, and only the flat surfaces of some light guide plates are non-transmissive. Permeability processing may be performed.

The light guide plate cover 1936 accommodates two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, and each side surface 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side of each light guide plate 1911 faces the LED substrate 1922. Further, the plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 1922 from the proximal end side to the anti-base end side of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B while overlapping with each other, thereby causing the LED substrate 1922. When the LEDs arranged in the above are lit, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are visually recognized with parallax (deviation) from the player's viewpoint, resulting in a three-dimensional effect. It will be possible.

Further, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B have circles on the upper end side and the base end side, the upper end side and the anti-base end side, the lower end side and the base end side, and the lower end and the anti-base end side, respectively. Opening holes 19112A, 19114A, 19116A, 19118A, 19112B, 19114B, 19116B, 19118B are formed.

Then, the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected at the upper end by a plurality of protruding members (not shown) formed on the upper locking member 1938 penetrating each circular opening on the upper end side. Similarly, the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected at the lower end by a plurality of protruding members (not shown) formed on the lower upper locking member 1940 penetrating each circular opening on the lower end side. The two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936. When connecting the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, a decorative cover 1942 that functions as a decorative plate of the left light effect unit 900L is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 1911.

The protrusion members penetrating the circular openings of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B have substantially the same length regardless of whether they are on the proximal end side or the anti-base end side. In this way, by making the protrusion members penetrating the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B substantially the same, the length can be kept within a constant range regardless of the distance between the light guide plates (horizontal length to the opposite light guide plates). It can be suppressed.

The upper and lower ends of the light guide plate cover 1936 are connected to the lens base 1930 by a cover mounting member (not shown), and the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 are integrally arranged so as to face the LED substrate 1922.

Further, the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B on the base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are also cut so as to form a surface facing the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1922, so that light is emitted from the LED. The light is incident on the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side substantially perpendicularly so that the light can be sufficiently received.

Here, with respect to the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, the flat surfaces 1911A and 1911B3 are cut so as to form a surface facing the LED, similarly to the three light guide plates 911A, 911B and 911C. As a result, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B can be increased, and while the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are tilted with respect to the LED substrate 1922, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911 are tilted. It is possible to make the image appear clearly in.

Further, on the side opposite to the LED substrate 1922 side, an open region 1980 is formed between the lens 1928 and the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. Then, in this open area 1980, various light effects can be performed.

As described above, the inner wall (reflecting member) 914L, 914R (see, for example, FIGS. 57 and 58) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 is in the direction of inclination of the light guide plate on the front side of the LED substrate 1922. It is tilted in the same direction. When the light emitted from the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1922 enters the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 of the light guide plate 1911, the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 and 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 have patterns and characters applied in advance. Images such as appear. The images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are reflected by the inner wall 914L that functions as a reflecting surface and reach the player's field of view. A part of the light emitted from the lens 1928 is also reflected and reaches the player's field of view. In this case, the player directly visually recognizes the light emitted from the lens 1928 and / or the image appearing on each of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, and visually recognizes the image reflected by the inner wall 914L and the like. In combination with, it is possible to make people aware of the effect that the image of light is doubled.

Further, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are not perpendicular to the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, respectively, but are the tables of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. The back surface is cut so that the angle formed with the front surface (the surface on the player side) is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 71). As described above, since the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side are also cut, the cross section seen when these light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are cut in the horizontal direction is a flat surface as shown in FIG. 71, for example. Of the front and back surfaces of 1911A3 and 1911B3, the trapezoidal shape has the back surface (the surface on the lens 1928 side) as the upper bottom and the front surface (the surface on the player side) as the lower bottom.

As described above, the angle between the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on the anti-base end side and the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 is an acute angle. By cutting the light guide plate 1911 so as to be such, it is possible to make it difficult for the player side to see the light emitted from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 1911 (each of the light guide plate 1911 from the player side). The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 can only be recognized as linear along the opposite end end side), and the player's consciousness can be watched on the images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a party to the game of the pachislot, the light emitted from each side surface 1911A2 and 1911B2 of the light guide plate 1911 is used to make the pachislot in an advantageous state or to have an expectation. It is possible to appeal that it is in a high state. Among them, when a plurality of light guide plates 1911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side are substantially flush with each other, the side surfaces 1911A2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B Since the thickness of 1911B2 becomes thicker and thick light is emitted, it is possible to strongly appeal to the above-mentioned third party. Further, since the light emitted from the lens 1928 can be visually recognized even in the open region 1980, the effect is great. Further, in combination with the light emitted from each side surface 911A2 and 911B2 of the light guide plate 911, it is possible to appeal over a wide range. In particular, in a game machine in which an effect image is displayed by projecting an image light projected from a projector 213, the appealing power to a third party tends to be weakened, so that the effect is remarkable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are placed between the front and back surfaces (the surface on the player side) of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. The angle is cut so that it is an acute angle, but instead, it may be cut so that it is an obtuse angle. In this case, the light emission from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 1911 can be visually recognized from the player side, and is combined with the images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911. Therefore, it is possible to perform a production that enhances the interest of the player.

Further, the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 1911A2, 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 1911 can be arbitrarily determined, but if the emission color is set to a warm color or a rainbow color, the game is further enhanced. It is possible to enhance the interest of the person. Further, the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 911 and the emission color of the light emitted from each side surface 1911A2, 1911B2 on the anti-base end side of the light guide plate 1911. By changing, for example, according to the game state, various effects can be performed.

Regarding the left light guide plate subunit 910L, the side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the third light guide plate 911C has a comb-like shape corresponding to the LED arrangement pitch, but the right light guide plate subunit 910R has an LED. It does not have a comb-shaped light guide plate corresponding to the arrangement pitch of. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right light guide plate subunit 910R may also have a comb-shaped light guide plate corresponding to the LED arrangement pitch.

Further, when the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are arranged in an overlapping manner, the space between one light guide plate and the other adjacent light guide plates is widened on the proximal end side, and gradually toward the anti-base end side. I try to make it narrower. In the method, a rib having an inclined surface that inclines downward from the proximal end side to the opposite proximal end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. However, bosses having different heights on the proximal end side and the anti-base end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B.

In this way, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plates widest on the proximal end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the adjacent rows from entering. Further, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the anti-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to a third party can be enhanced. it can. Further, since the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected to each other by forming ribs and bosses on the light guide plates facing each other and fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936, the stability when transporting pastillo is also improved. It exerts the effect of being excellent.

(3) Mode of Light Emitting Effect of Light Effect Unit Next, the mode of light emission effect of the light effect unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. Here, of the right side light effect unit 900R and the left side light effect unit 900L, the right side light effect unit 900R will be described as an example.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an aspect of the right light effect unit 900 when neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R is performing the light emission effect. In this case, no pattern appears on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 on any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C (see, for example, FIG. 65). Therefore, the right lens subunit 912R behind the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3.

However, all or at least one of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is subjected to a non-transmissive treatment. In this impermeable treatment, letters / patterns 915 of the alphabet are applied to the upper and lower portions of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. Since the portion subjected to the non-transmissive treatment is vapor-deposited with, for example, a silver metal color foil, it can be visually recognized regardless of whether or not the light emission effect is performed. Here, the pattern or the like is not visually recognized in the light transmitting region, but the characters / patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transmissive regions can be visually recognized. Therefore, since the light transmitting region around the transparent region is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transmissive region can be seen three-dimensionally and conspicuously. Therefore, even if neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R is subjected to the light emission effect, the visual visual effect can be provided.

In FIG. 74, when the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is partially lit, the light emitting effect is performed on the right light guide plate subunit 910R, and the light emitting effect is not performed on the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right-hand light effect unit 900R. In this case, patterns related to the pachislot motif appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

Here, the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 922 from the base end side to the anti-base end side of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C while overlapping each other. Therefore, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be visually recognized with parallax, and a three-dimensional image appears to emerge. In FIG. 74, since the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 are each provided with a triangular pattern 916, it is difficult to grasp on the drawing, but the patterns applied to the respective flat surface carrying surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. The 916 is visually recognized with parallax, and a three-dimensional effect can be felt. In this way, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In FIG. 75, when the LED 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 is partially lit, the light emitting effect is not performed on the right light guide plate subunit 910R, and the light emitting effect is performed on the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right-hand light effect unit 900R. In this case, on any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, any pattern including a triangular pattern 916 (see, for example, FIG. 74) is included in the light transmitting region of each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. It has not appeared either. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the right lens subunit 912R behind can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

However, patterns and the like are not visible in the light transmitting regions of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3 and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B and 911C, but the characters and patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transparent regions are visible. can do. At this time, since the light transmitting region around the light transmitting region is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transmissive region can be seen three-dimensionally and conspicuously. In particular, since the light emitting effect of the right lens subunit 912R is performed, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transmissive region can be visually recognized more conspicuously. In this way, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachislot gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. There may be.

<Supplementary note (summary of the invention according to the first embodiment)>
[1st to 4th game machines]
Conventionally, a game machine having a function of reading moving image data into a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), expanding the moving image data, and displaying a three-dimensional moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal display has been proposed (for example, JP-A-7-). See 155438 (see).

By the way, in recent years, in a game machine equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, high-quality and various productions that make full use of three-dimensional CG (Computer Graphics) technology have become mainstream. Then, since CG data for performing the various effects is created in advance and the created CG data is stored in the CG ROM, the cost related to the CG creation is increasing year by year.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned first problem, and the first object of the present invention is to suppress an increase in cost related to CG creation and to obtain high image quality by making full use of three-dimensional CG technology. It is to provide a game machine that enables various productions.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-1 game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and
Non-volatile in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. A sexual memory unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) is provided.
The control unit
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
It has a volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object.
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) on the virtual object arranged in the virtual space. The data of the first viewpoint image (for example, the virtual projection image data) projected on the virtual object is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object.
A second image acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light) in the virtual space. The viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data) is generated, and the data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the volatile storage unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the data of the second viewpoint image stored in the volatile storage unit is converted into a video signal and the video signal is output.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides the first and second gaming machines having the following configurations.

[1-2 game machines]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
Storage in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. (For example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object.
When the image processing unit virtually projects an image corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) on the virtual object arranged in the virtual space, the image processing unit performs the above. The data of the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, the virtual projected image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object, and the virtual is generated in the virtual space. The data of the second viewpoint image (for example, virtual) acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the object is virtually photographed from the second direction (for example, the incident direction of the actual video light). A gaming machine characterized by generating captured image data).

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides the first to third game machines having the following configurations.

[No. 1-3 game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image onto the display unit,
Storage in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. (For example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object.
When the image processing unit virtually projects an image corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) on the virtual object arranged in the virtual space, the above-mentioned Data of the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, virtual projected image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object, and the virtual object is created in the virtual space. The data of the second viewpoint image (for example, virtual) acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the object is virtually photographed from the second direction (for example, the incident direction of the actual video light). Generate captured image data)
The first direction is the direction of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second direction is the incident direction of the video light with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-1 game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and
Non-volatile in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. A sexual memory unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) is provided.
The control unit
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
It has a volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object.
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) on the virtual object arranged in the virtual space. When this is done, the data of the first viewpoint image (for example, the virtual projection image data) projected on the virtual object is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object, and the first The data of the viewpoint image of the above is stored in the first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
A second image acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of the actual video light) in the virtual space. The viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data) is generated, and the data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the second buffer (for example, frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
The data of the image displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. A gaming machine characterized in that data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is converted into a video signal and the video signal is output.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second game machine having the following configuration.

[2-2 game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
Non-volatile in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. With a sexual memory unit (for example, Rom cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
A volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object.
The image processing unit uses the volatile storage unit to correspond to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) with respect to the virtual object arranged in the virtual space. Data of the first viewpoint image (for example, virtual projection image data) projected on the virtual object when the image is virtually projected is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object. Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in the first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the first one projected onto the virtual object in the virtual space. The data of the second viewpoint image (for example, the virtual photographed image data) acquired when the viewpoint image is virtually photographed from the second direction (for example, the incident direction of the actual video light) is generated and the said. The data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the second buffer (for example, the frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the data is stored.
The data of the image displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , The data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is converted into a video signal, and the video signal is output.
A gaming machine characterized in that the size of the third buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the size of the second buffer is larger than the size of the third buffer.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 2-3 game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image onto the display unit,
Non-volatile in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit are stored. With a sexual memory unit (for example, Rom cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
A volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object.
The image processing unit uses the volatile storage unit to correspond to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) with respect to the virtual object arranged in the virtual space. Data of the first viewpoint image (for example, virtual projection image data) projected on the virtual object when the image is virtually projected is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object. Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in the first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the first one projected onto the virtual object in the virtual space. The data of the second viewpoint image (for example, the virtual photographed image data) acquired when the viewpoint image is virtually photographed from the second direction (for example, the incident direction of the actual video light) is generated and the said. The data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the second buffer (for example, the frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the data of the image displayed on the display unit is stored in the data of the second viewpoint image. The stored second buffer is transferred to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is video. The video signal is output after being converted into a signal, the first direction is the direction of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit, and the second direction is the direction of the display unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it is the direction in which the image light is incident on the display surface of an image.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 3-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[3-1st game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit. ), And a non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which texture information (for example, texture data) relating to the structure of the display unit is stored.
The control unit
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
It has a volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and selects the texture information.
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data is obtained from the predetermined original image data and the texture information. Generated based on
A gaming machine characterized in that the pseudo three-dimensional image data generated by the volatile storage unit is converted into a video signal and the converted video signal is output.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third-two gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Third 3rd game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A storage unit (for example,) in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and texture information (for example, texture data) related to the structure of the display unit are stored. , ROM cartridge board 86),
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects the texture information.
The image processing unit
It is characterized in that pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the texture information. Game machine.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[3rd-3rd game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image onto the display unit,
A non-volatile storage unit in which a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit and texture information (for example, texture data) related to the structure of the display unit are stored. (For example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
A volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and selects the texture information.
The image processing unit
Pseudo-three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the texture information to generate the volatile property. Store in a predetermined buffer (for example, frame buffer) of the storage unit,
The image data displayed on the display unit is transferred from the predetermined buffer in which the pseudo three-dimensional image data is stored to a specific buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the specific buffer is transferred. The data stored in the buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is converted into a video signal, the video signal is output, the size of the specific buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the predetermined buffer. A gaming machine characterized in that the size of is greater than the size of the particular buffer.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-1 game machine having the following configuration.

[4-1st game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double angle data including resource image data) and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual). A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a rom cartridge substrate 86) in which object data or texture data is stored is provided.
The control unit
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
It has a volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit.
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from the plurality of image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit.
The image processing unit
From the image data obtained by performing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data based on the information for displaying the image on the display unit, using a specific conversion parameter (for example, projection matrix Pe), the said The data of the image displayed by the display unit is extracted, the data of the extracted image is converted into a video signal, and the video signal is output.
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, projection matrix P'for example, for performing a projection conversion process on the image data to which the predetermined processing has been performed and the viewing angle is set to a predetermined angle. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, the offset matrix O), which is a parameter generated based on the game machine.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-2 game machine having the following configuration.

[Second game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double angle of view data including resource image data) and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual). A storage unit (for example, a rom cartridge board 86) in which object data or texture data is stored, and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from the plurality of image data stored in the storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit.
The image processing unit
From the image data obtained by performing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data based on the information for displaying the image on the display unit, using a specific conversion parameter (for example, projection matrix Pe), the said Converted to the data of the image displayed by the display unit,
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, projection matrix P') for performing a projection conversion process on the image data to which the predetermined processing has been performed and the viewing angle is set to a predetermined angle. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, the offset matrix O), which is a parameter generated based on the game machine.

Further, in order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4th-3rd game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double angle of view data including resource image data) and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual). A storage unit (for example, a rom cartridge board 86) in which object data or texture data is stored, and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from the plurality of image data stored in the storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit.
The image processing unit
From the image data obtained by performing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data based on the information for displaying the image on the display unit, using a specific conversion parameter (for example, projection matrix Pe), the said The data of the image displayed by the display unit is extracted and
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, projection matrix P'for example, for performing a projection conversion process on the image data to which the predetermined processing has been performed and the viewing angle is set to a predetermined angle. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, the offset matrix O).
A gaming machine characterized in that the size of the image data subjected to the predetermined processing is larger than the size of the image data extracted by using the specific conversion parameter.

According to the first to fourth game machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to perform various effects with high image quality by making full use of the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in the cost related to CG production.

[Fifth and sixth game machines]
Conventionally, a game machine having a function of reading moving image data into a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), expanding the moving image data, and displaying a three-dimensional moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal display has been proposed (for example, JP-A-7-). See 155438 (see).

By the way, in recent years, in a game machine equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, high-quality and various productions that make full use of three-dimensional CG (Computer Graphics) technology have become mainstream. Then, since CG data for performing the various effects is created in advance and the created CG data is stored in the CG ROM, the cost related to the CG creation is increasing year by year. Further, conventionally, in this technical field, a technique of projecting an image onto an object such as a three-dimensional object (three-dimensional screen) by using a projector by a method called a project mapping (texture mapping) method has been proposed. Adjustments to eliminate the deviation of the projected image with respect to the object are the biggest concern.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned second problem, and a second object of the present invention is to suppress an increase in cost related to CG creation and to display an image as a three-dimensional object (using a projector). It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of minimizing the deviation of a projected image with respect to an object when projecting onto an object such as a stereoscopic screen).

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 5-1 game machine having the following configuration.

[5-1th game machine]
A fixed first display unit (for example, a trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, a pseudo reel member 303) are included, and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit. One is a display unit (for example, various projected members) that can display an image, and
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit. ), And a non-volatile storage unit (for example, a rom cartridge substrate 86) in which data of a virtual object (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the form of the display unit to be displayed of the image is stored.
Movable control means (for example, projected member moving mechanism 305) that movably controls the second display unit.
And with
The control unit
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
It has a volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit.
The control processing unit selects a predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data. Select the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually generated from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) on the predetermined virtual object arranged in the virtual space. The data of the first viewpoint image (for example, virtual projection image data) projected on the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined original image data is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the predetermined virtual object. Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in the first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
A second image obtained when the first viewpoint image projected onto the predetermined virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light) in the virtual space. Data of the second viewpoint image (for example, virtual captured image data) is generated, and the data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the second buffer (for example, frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
The data of the image displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , The data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is converted into a video signal, and the video signal is output.
When the second display unit is movably controlled by the movable control means, the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponds to the form of the display unit according to the operation status of the second display unit. A game machine characterized by using virtual object data.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 5-2 game machine having the following configuration.

[No. 5-2 game machine]
A fixed first display unit (for example, a trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, a pseudo reel member 303) are included, and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit. One is a display unit (for example, various projected members) that can display an image, and
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a virtual object corresponding to the form of the display unit to be displayed on the image (for example,). A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge board 86) in which virtual object data) is stored,
A movable control means (for example, a projected member moving mechanism 305) that movably controls the second display unit, and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
A volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects a predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data. Select the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually generated from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) on the predetermined virtual object arranged in the virtual space. The data of the first viewpoint image (for example, virtual projection image data) projected on the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined original image data is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the predetermined virtual object. Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in the first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
A second image obtained when the first viewpoint image projected onto the predetermined virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light) in the virtual space. Data of the second viewpoint image (for example, virtual captured image data) is generated, and the data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the second buffer (for example, frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
The data of the image displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , The data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is converted into a video signal, and the video signal is output.
When the second display unit is movably controlled by the movable control means, the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponds to the form of the display unit according to the operation status of the second display unit. Using virtual object data
A gaming machine characterized in that the size of the third buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the size of the second buffer is larger than the size of the third buffer.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fifth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[5th-3rd game machine]
A fixed first display unit (for example, a trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, a pseudo reel member 303) are included, and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit. One is a display unit (for example, various projected members) that can display an image, and
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image onto the display unit,
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a virtual object corresponding to the form of the display unit to be displayed on the image (for example,). A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge board 86) in which virtual object data) is stored,
A movable control means (for example, a projected member moving mechanism 305) that movably controls the second display unit, and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
A volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects a predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data. Select the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually generated from a first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) on the predetermined virtual object arranged in the virtual space. The data of the first viewpoint image (for example, virtual projection image data) projected on the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined original image data is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the predetermined virtual object. Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in the first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
A second image obtained when the first viewpoint image projected onto the predetermined virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light) in the virtual space. Data of the second viewpoint image (for example, virtual captured image data) is generated, and the data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the second buffer (for example, frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit.
The data of the image displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer in which the data of the second viewpoint image is stored to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , The data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is converted into a video signal, and the video signal is output.
When the second display unit is movably controlled by the movable control means, the data of the predetermined virtual object corresponds to the form of the display unit according to the operation status of the second display unit. Using virtual object data
The first direction is the direction of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second direction is the incident direction of the video light with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit.

Further, in order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the 6-1 game machine having the following configuration.

[6-1th game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display form composed of the display unit (for example, for example). A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a rom cartridge board 86) in which data of a synthetic virtual object is stored is provided.
The control unit
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit, and
It has a volatile storage unit (for example, VRAM 154) used when the processing is executed by the image processing unit.
The control processing unit selects a predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the control processing unit of the display unit to be displayed on the predetermined original image data. Select the data of the first virtual object corresponding to the display form, and select
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, the first virtual object is decomposed into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of each projected member) corresponding to the display form.
The volatile storage unit is used to correspond to the predetermined original image data from the first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight) with respect to each second virtual object arranged in the virtual space. The data of the first viewpoint image (for example, the virtual projection image data of each projected member) projected on each of the second virtual objects when the moving image is virtually projected is the predetermined original image data and the data. The first viewpoint image generated based on the data of each second virtual object and generated for each second virtual object is synthesized and virtually projected onto the first virtual object. Generates composite image data (for example, composited virtual projection image data)
A second image acquired when the composite image projected on the first virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light) in the virtual space. The viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data) is generated, and the data of the second viewpoint image is stored in the volatile storage unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the data of the second viewpoint image stored in the volatile storage unit is converted into a video signal and the video signal is output.

Further, in order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the sixth-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[6-2 game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display form composed of the display unit (for example, for example). A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge board 86) in which data of a synthetic virtual object is stored, and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects a predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and displays a display form of the display unit to be displayed with the predetermined original image data. Select the data of the first virtual object corresponding to
The image processing unit
The first virtual object is decomposed into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of each projected member) corresponding to the display form, and each second virtual object arranged in the virtual space is obtained. On the other hand, when a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a predetermined direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight), a predetermined viewpoint image projected on each second virtual object. Data (for example, virtual projection image data of each projected member) was generated based on the predetermined original image data and data of each second virtual object, and was generated for each second virtual object. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined viewpoint image is synthesized to generate data of a composite image virtually projected on the first virtual object (for example, composited virtual projection image data).

Further, in order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides the sixth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 6-3 game machine]
A display unit on which an image is displayed (for example, various projected members) and
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image onto the display unit,
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display form composed of the display unit (for example, for example). A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge board 86) in which data of a synthetic virtual object is stored, and
A control processing unit (for example, sub CPU 151) that controls the generation processing of the image to be displayed on the display unit, and
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in response to control by the control processing unit is provided.
The control processing unit selects a predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and displays a display form of the display unit to be displayed with the predetermined original image data. Select the data of the first virtual object corresponding to
The image processing unit
The first virtual object is decomposed into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of each projected member) corresponding to the display form, and each second virtual object arranged in the virtual space is obtained. On the other hand, when a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from the first direction (for example, the direction of the player's line of sight), the first one projected on each second virtual object. The viewpoint image data (for example, the virtual projection image data of each projected member) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of each second virtual object, and is generated for each second virtual object. The first viewpoint image is synthesized to generate the data of the composite image virtually projected on the first virtual object (for example, the composited virtual projection image data).
A second image acquired when the composite image projected on the first virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, the incident direction of actual video light) in the virtual space. Generate viewpoint image data (for example, virtual shooting image data)
The first direction is the direction of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second direction is the incident direction of the video light with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit.

According to the fifth and sixth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, when the increase in the cost related to CG creation is suppressed and the image is projected onto an object such as a three-dimensional object (three-dimensional screen) using a projector. , It is possible to minimize the deviation of the projected image with respect to the object.

<Supplementary note (summary of the invention according to the second embodiment)>
[7th-14th game machines]
Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever is operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media can be mentioned.

By the way, a game machine including a projector that projects video light toward the front has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187444). In the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187444, the image light projected from the projector is reflected to the back side of the game machine main body, and the reflected image light is projected as a first projected member. It includes a second projected member. Then, the image light representing the two-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface of the first projected member, and the image light representing the three-dimensional image is projected on the projection surface of the second projected member. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that gives a three-dimensional effect and depth to the image.

However, in recent years, by effectively exerting the function peculiar to the game machine that the image is projected by the image light projected from the projector, the effect of the image visual effect is higher than before, and the player can perform more. It is required to enhance the interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to preferably enhance the interest by producing a production having a higher visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 7-1 game machine having the following configuration.

[7-1th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a The movable projected member driving means includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection region of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear-shaped portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It is characterized by having a drive mechanism 815 and a large diameter gear 742).

According to the game machine of (1) above, it has a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction, and is multifaceted using a 360-degree outer peripheral surface. The image projected on one projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and other images are switched by switching a part of the projection surface on which the image is projected (the projection surface portion excluding the lower screen 7082). It is possible to realize an effect in which both the image projected on the projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. .. Such a production with a high visual visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing a function peculiar to a game machine in which an image is projected by projecting an image light. ..

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection regions, there are three projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). , It is characterized by having a triangular columnar shape surrounded by the three projection regions.

According to the game machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is a polygonal columnar shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, for example). When the projection area on which the image is projected is changed from one projection area to another by the image light projected from the projector 213), an irrelevant projection between one projection area and the other projection area is performed. It may be necessary to go through the area. At this point, the movable projected member is in three projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular columnar shape, the movable projected member can be rotated about 120 degrees in the forward or reverse direction, and one projection area can be immediately converted to another projection area without passing through an irrelevant projection area. It is possible to change to.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a 7-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[7th-2 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having the above in the circumferential direction, and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a movable screen unit 700) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member driving means includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection region of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear-shaped portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742), and the movable projected member has a plurality of projection regions having different three-dimensional shapes of the projection surface on which the image is projected in the circumferential direction. And.

According to the game machine (1), the columnar movable projected member has a simple configuration in which the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is rotated in the circumferential direction, and the outer peripheral surface of 360 degrees is formed. By using it to switch the projection planes in multiple directions, it is possible to realize an effect in which both the image projected on one projection area and the image projected on the other projection area can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. Such an effect with high visual visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing a function peculiar to a game machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. .. Moreover, the movable projected member has a plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714) having different solid (undulating) shapes of the projection surface on which the image light is projected. Since the projection surface 7141 and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 are provided in the circumferential direction, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can visually recognize any of the plurality of projection areas. It is possible to perform high-quality production.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712) that the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) have a flat shape (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and a convex shape (for example, a third). The projection surface 7167 of the screen member 716), the concave shape (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714), and the three-dimensional shape combining these, each of which has the projection surface of a different shape. ..

According to the gaming machine (2), the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) has a flat shape (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712). 7123), convex shape (for example, projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), concave shape (for example, projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and a three-dimensional shape combining these. Since it can be changed to, it is possible to produce a higher visual effect than ever before.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the seventh-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[7th-3rd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a movable screen unit 700) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member driving means includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection region of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear-shaped portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area. The movable projected member is rotated in the circumferential direction with a predetermined axis as a rotation axis (for example, rotation axis 722) so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized, and the projection area is changed to the one projection area. The movable projected member has a rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed from the above to the other projection area, and the movable projected member has a three-dimensional shape of a projection surface on which the image is projected. Have a plurality of different projection regions in the circumferential direction and have a predetermined weight, which makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the movable projected member closer to the rotation axis (for example, weight members 7326, 7366). ).

According to the game machine of (1) above, it has a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction, and is multifaceted using a 360-degree outer peripheral surface. By switching the projection plane, it is possible to realize an effect in which both the image light projected on one projection area and the image light projected on the other projection area can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. Such an effect with high visual visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing a function peculiar to a game machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. .. Moreover, the movable projected member circles a plurality of projection regions (for example, drive mechanism 815, large-diameter gear 742, stopper mechanism 790, and gear shape portion 744) in which the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface on which the image light is projected is different. Since it is held in the direction, it is possible to perform an effect with a higher visual visual effect, such that the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can visually recognize any of the plurality of projection areas.

By the way, when the movable projected member has a plurality of projection regions having different three-dimensional shapes of the projection surface on which the image light is projected in the circumferential direction, the center of gravity and the rotation axis (for example, the rotation axis 722) of the movable projected member ), And the rotational balance of the movable projected member may become unbalanced. Therefore, by having a weight member that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the movable projected member and the rotation axis closer to each other, there are a plurality of projection regions in the circumferential direction in which the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface on which the image light is projected is different. However, it is possible to suppress the unbalanced rotation of the movable projected member, and it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712) that the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) are the projections having a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, or a three-dimensional shape combining these, which are different from each other. It is characterized by having a surface.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) has a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, or a three-dimensional shape combining these. Since it can be changed to any of the shapes in various ways, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect than ever before. Moreover, even if the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can be variously changed to a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, or a three-dimensional shape combining these, a movable projected member (for example, a movable screen). Since the unit 700) has a weight member (for example, weight members 7326 and 7366) that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis, it is possible to suitably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the eighth game machine having the following configuration.

[8th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having the above in the circumferential direction, and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a movable screen unit 700) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member driving means includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection region of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear-shaped portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large diameter gear 742), the stopping means has an actuating member (for example, a stopper mechanism 790) that can be actuated in the vertical direction, and the movable projected member is the actuating member. An engaging member (for example, a protrusion) formed with an engaging portion (for example, a gear shape portion 744) to which the operating member can engage when the member operates in the vertical direction along the circumferential direction at predetermined angles. It is characterized by having 7442).

According to the game machine of (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is positioned at a desired position with a simple configuration in which the operating member (for example, the stopper mechanism 790) is operated in the vertical direction. Can be stopped with. In particular, if the above-mentioned predetermined angle (the angle at which the engaging member (for example, the protrusion 7442) is formed along the circumferential direction) is small, the movable projected member is projected to an arbitrary position (for example, one projection area). The image is projected by projecting the image light, such as stopping at a position where both the image light to be projected and the image light projected to the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized. It is possible to produce a higher visual effect by making the best use of the functions peculiar to the game machine, which enhances the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection regions to be formed, there are three projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). However, it is characterized by having a triangular columnar shape surrounded by the three projection regions.

According to the game machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is a polygonal columnar shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, for example). When changing the projection area on which the image light projected from the projector 213) is projected from one projection area to another, the projection area is irrelevant between one projection area and the other projection area. It may be necessary to do so. At this point, the movable projected member is in three projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular columnar shape, the movable projected member can be rotated about 120 degrees in the forward or reverse direction, and one projection area can be immediately converted to another projection area without passing through an irrelevant projection area. It is possible to change to.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an 8-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[8-2 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having the above in the circumferential direction, and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a movable screen unit 700) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member driving means includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection region of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear-shaped portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large diameter gear 742), the stopping means has a rod-shaped operating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be operated in the vertical direction, and the movable projected member is the rod-shaped member. Ribs (for example, protrusions 7442) projecting outward in diameter at predetermined angles are provided in the circumferential direction so that the tips of the rod-shaped actuating members can be engaged when the actuating members of the above are actuated in the vertical direction. It has an engaging member (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744) formed along the above, and the rod-shaped operating member is characterized in that the corner portion of the tip portion is chamfered.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the rod-shaped operating member is formed into a rib (for example, a protrusion 7442) and a rib by simply operating the rod-shaped operating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction. The movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position by engaging with the movable screen unit 700. Moreover, since the corners of the tip of the rod-shaped operating member are chamfered, the movable projected member moves in the circumferential direction even if it is caught without being engaged between the ribs. Sometimes the ribs push up the rod-shaped actuating member, making it possible to prevent catching.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the eighth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[8th-3rd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a movable screen unit 700) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member driving means includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means is a projection of the plurality of projection regions (for example, a first screen member 712). The movable projected member is stopped so that an image is projected on the projection region of any one of the surface 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). Possible stopping means (eg, stopper mechanism 790 and gear-shaped portion 744) and the image projected on one projection area of the plurality of projection areas and the other projection area adjacent to the one projection area. A rotating means (eg, for example) capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction so that any of the projected images can be visually recognized. It has a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742), the stopping means has a rod-shaped operating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be operated in the vertical direction, and the movable projected member is the rod-shaped member. Ribs (for example, protrusions 7442) that project outward in the radial direction at predetermined angles are circumferential so that the tips of the rod-shaped actuating members can be engaged when the actuating members of the above are actuated in the vertical direction. The rib has an engaging member formed along the direction (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744), and the rib formed on the engaging member has a radial outer portion in the circumferential direction as compared with a radial inner portion. It is characterized in that it is formed so as to swell.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the rod-shaped operating member is formed into a rib (for example, a protrusion 7442) and a rib by simply operating the rod-shaped operating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction. The movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position by engaging with the movable screen unit 700. Moreover, since the rib formed on the engaging member is formed so that the radial outer portion bulges in the circumferential direction as compared with the radial inner portion, once engaged between the rib and the rib, The engagement is hard to come off, and it is possible to prevent the movable projected member from unintentionally rotating.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A columnar movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a movable screen unit 700) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. , Drive mechanism 815, large-diameter gear 742, stopper mechanism 790, and gear shape portion 744), and a position detecting means (for example, an optical sensor unit) capable of detecting the position of the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member driving means rotates the movable projected member in response to the detection by the position detecting means that the movable projected member is at a specific position in the circumferential direction. It has a stopping means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear shape portion 744) capable of stopping at a predetermined position, and the position detecting means is a longitudinal shielding member extending in the circumferential direction (for example, a light shielding piece 791). ) And a sensor capable of detecting the passage of the shielding member, and the shielding member and the sensor are configured to rotate relatively with the rotation of the movable projected member, and the stop. The means is configured to stop the rotation of the movable projected member in response to the detection of the passage of the shielding member by the sensor, and the circumferential length of the shielding member is determined by the sensor. Even if the rotation of the movable projected member is stopped after rotating by a predetermined angle after passing through the above, the length is set to be detected by the sensor.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the rotation of the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is stopped in response to the detection of the passage of the shielding member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) by the sensor. At that time, it takes a predetermined time for the movable projected member to decelerate and actually stop. In consideration of this predetermined time, the shielding member passes the sensor in the circumferential length of the shielding member. Even if the movable projected member stops rotating after rotating by a predetermined angle, the length is set to be detected by the sensor. Thereby, for example, if the shielding member is not detected by the sensor when the rotation of the movable projected member is stopped, it can be determined that the misalignment has occurred. Therefore, even if a trouble such as a misalignment occurs, the subsequent processing can be appropriately performed, so that it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 10-1 game machine having the following configuration.

[10th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) and a movable projected member driving means means capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. (For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projected member includes a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) forming a first projection region. The projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) and the second projection surface (for example, the second projection surface) forming the second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. It has at least the projection surface 7123) of the screen member 712, and a joint groove (for example, groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the first projection surface, and the second projection surface is formed in the joint groove. By joining the back surfaces of the above, the prismatic corner portion is formed by the first projection surface and the second projection surface.

According to the game machine of (1) above, in the joint groove formed on the back surface of the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). By joining the back surfaces of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712), a prismatic corner portion is formed between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. Therefore, it is possible to fill the gap between the two end portions on the long side side of the first projection surface and the end portion on the long side side of the second projection surface. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen from the front, the continuity of the image projected from the projector (for example, the projector 213). Can be suppressed as much as possible, and the discomfort that can be caused by the gap between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface is caused. Since it can be reduced, it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the tenth and second game machines having the following configurations.

[10-2 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having the movable projected member in the circumferential direction, and a movable projected member driving means capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction (for example, a movable screen unit 700). For example, the movable projected member includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member has a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) forming a first projection region. The projection surface 7123 of the screen member 712 of 1) and the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 or the third of the second screen member 714) forming the second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. The first projection surface and the second projection surface have at least the projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface are the back surface side of the first projection surface forming the prismatic corners. It is characterized in that it is fixed by a rod-shaped member (for example, arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side of the second projection surface.

According to the game machine (1), the first projection surface and the second projection surface are the back surface side of the first projection surface and the second projection surface forming a prismatic corner portion. Since it is fixed by a rod-shaped member (for example, arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the length of the first projection surface can be obtained. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the two end portions on the side side and the end portion on the long side side of the second projection surface. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen in the front view, the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) It is possible to suppress the continuity of the projected image from being interrupted as much as possible, and between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Since the discomfort that may occur due to the gap can be reduced, it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the rod-shaped member (for example, arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side of the first projection surface and the back surface side of the second projection surface is movable. A plurality of members to be projected (for example, the movable screen unit 700) are provided along the longitudinal direction, so that the first projection surface and the second projection surface are fixed.

According to the game machine (2), since a plurality of rod-shaped members (for example, arm member 7144) are provided along the longitudinal direction of the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700), the first projection is performed. Even in the middle abdomen where a gap is particularly likely to occur between the surface and the second projection surface, the occurrence of the gap can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) forms the prismatic corner portion of the first projection surface. A joint groove (for example, groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the portion, and the back surface of the second projection surface is joined to the joint groove.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the back surface of the second projection surface is joined to the joint groove (for example, groove 7142) formed on the back surface of the first projection surface forming the corners of the prism. Therefore, it is possible to fill the gap between the two end portions on the long side side of the first projection surface and the end portion on the long side side of the second projection surface. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen in the front view, the continuous image projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is continuous. It is possible to suppress the interruption of sex as much as possible, and the discomfort that may occur due to the gap between the end on the long side of the first projection surface and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the tenth to third game machines having the following configurations.

[10th-3rd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having the movable projected member in the circumferential direction, and a movable projected member driving means capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction (for example, a movable screen unit 700). For example, the movable projected member includes a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member has a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) forming a first projection region. The projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) forming the second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. It has at least one of the first projection surface and the second projection surface, and the other projection surface side is on the back surface side of one of the projection surfaces (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). At least two ribs (for example, female rib 7164) are formed toward the surface, and at least one rib (for example, male) is formed on the back surface side of the other projection surface toward the back surface side of the one projection surface. Ribs 7145) are formed, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface have one rib formed on the back surface side of the other projection surface on the back surface side of the one projection surface. It is characterized in that it is fixed in a manner of being sandwiched between two formed ribs.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). One rib (for example, male rib 7145) formed on the back surface side of the other projection surface is sandwiched between two ribs (for example, female rib 7164) formed on the back surface side of one of the projection surfaces. Since it is fixed in the above-mentioned manner, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the generation of a gap between the two can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen in the front view, the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) It is possible to suppress the continuity of the projected image from being interrupted as much as possible, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort that may occur due to the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. It is possible to preferably perform an effect having a higher visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714). A joint groove (for example, groove 7143) is formed on the back surface of the portion forming the prismatic corner portion, and the projection of the second projection surface (for example, the third screen member 716) is formed on the joint groove. It is characterized in that the back surface of the surface 7167) is configured to be joined.

According to the game machine (2), the joint groove (for example, for example, the joint groove (for example, 7141 for the projection surface of the second screen member 714) forming the corners of the prismatic column) is formed on the back surface. Since the back surface of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) is joined to the groove 7143), it may occur at the joint portion between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. The gap between the two can be filled. Therefore, even if the movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the corners of the prismatic column can be seen in the front view, the projection is further projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213). It is possible to prevent the continuity of the image projected by the image light from being interrupted, and to reduce the discomfort that may occur due to the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

[11th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a plurality of projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A prismatic movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) to which a base member (for example, a right base 732) is attached to an end portion in the longitudinal direction, and provided on the base member. Movable projected member driving means (for example, drive mechanism 815, large-diameter gear 742, stopper mechanism 790, and gear shape portion 744) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projected member in the circumferential direction. The movable projected member is adjacent to a first projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) constituting the first projection area and the first projection area. A second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) forming the second projection area and a third projection area adjacent to the second projection area are formed. A plurality of prismatic corners having at least a projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) and adjacent projection surfaces are formed, and the plurality of corners are formed. At least one corner of the portion, on the back surface side of the two projection surfaces forming the one corner, a mounting defining member (for example, mounting defining rib 7122) that defines the mounting direction of the base member is provided. It is characterized in that it is provided.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the base member can be easily attached to the end portion of the movable projected member. In this way, by improving the work efficiency of assembly, it is possible to suitably realize a production with a high visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 12-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12-1 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection area (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection area can be changed. A movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projected member. The movable projected member driving means is provided with a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means can be either an image projected on the first projection area or an image projected on the second projection area. It is characterized in that the movable projected member is operably configured so that the movable member can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine (1), the image light projected on the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area (for example, the third screen member). It is possible to realize an effect in which both the image light projected on the projection surface 7167) of the 716 can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. Such a production with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized only by utilizing the functions peculiar to the projector.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region on which the image light is projected and the projection in the second projection region on which the image light is projected. It is characterized in that the three-dimensional shapes of the surfaces are different from each other.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are configured to be different from each other, the visual visual effect can be obtained. It is possible to perform higher production.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 12-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12-2 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection area (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection area can be changed. A movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projected member. A fixed projected member (eg, fixed base 708) having a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) and a fixed projection area (eg, lower screen 7082) on which the image projected from the projection means is projected. The movable projected member driving means can change the projection area between the first projection area and the second projection area in a state where the image is projected on the fixed display area. It is characterized by being composed of.

According to the game machine of (1) above, in a state where the image is projected on the fixed display area, the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area ( For example, since the projection area can be changed from the projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716, it is possible to realize a production with a higher visual visual effect and enhance the interest. In particular, when the projection area of the movable projected member and the fixed projection area (for example, the lower screen 7082) of the fixed projected member (for example, the fixed base 708) form one projection area. , The visual effect of the image is further enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) in the first projection region on which the image is projected, and the image. The three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) in the second projection region on which the screen member is projected is characterized in that the three-dimensional shapes are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) in the first projection region and the projection surface in the second projection region (for example, the third). Since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716 is configured to be different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 12th-3rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12-3 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a projection means capable of projecting image light (for example, a projector 213) and a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection area (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection area can be changed. A movable projected member material (for example, a movable screen unit 700) and a movable projected member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projected portion. , The stopper mechanism 790 and the gear shape portion 744), and the movable projected member driving means comprises an image projected on the first display area and an image projected on the second display area. The movable projected member can be operated in such a manner that any of them can be visually recognized, and the movable projected member shadows at least one of the first projection area and the second projection area. It is characterized in that it is configured so that a region is formed.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since a shadow region is formed in at least one of the first projection region and the second projection region, it is possible to realize an effect with a higher visual visual effect. , Can enhance the interest. That is, although the image light originally projected from the projection means can be projected, the image light is not projected and the shaded area is formed. As a result, for example, a hidden image that cannot be visually recognized in the shaded area is projected, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the movable projected member is operated so that the hidden image is projected. It will be possible to realize.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, at least one of the projection planes constituting the first projection region and the projection planes constituting the second projection region is the projection. It is characterized by having a convex portion that bulges on the side of the means.

According to the game machine of the above (2), it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual visual effect by a simple configuration having only a convex portion bulging on the side of the projection means.

Note that "bulging toward the projection means" means that when the image light is directly projected onto the projection surface by a projection means such as a projector, it swells toward the projection means such as the projector. When the image light projected by the projection means such as a projector is reflected by a reflecting member such as a mirror and then projected onto the projection surface, it means that the image light bulges toward the reflecting member such as the mirror.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 13-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for drawing lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a plurality of gaming states (for example, general gaming states) having different advantages for the player. , A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls one of the notification game states) and a projection means (for example, a projector 213) that can project video light according to the result of the lottery. The movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as the projection area on which the image is projected and the movable projected member are operated by the image light projected from the projection means. The movable projected member driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and a gear shape portion 744) is provided, and the movable projected member is an image projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area and a second projection area as a projection area on which an image is projected by light, and the projection area can be changed by being operated by the movable projected member driving means. At the same time, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region on which the image is projected by the video light and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region on which the image is projected by the video light are The movable projected member driving means is configured in different shapes from each other, and the movable projected member driving means is said to be movable projected so that the image light projected from the projection means is projected on different projection regions according to the gaming state. The member is configured to be operable.

According to the game machine of the above (1), not only the projection area on which the image is projected is changed according to the game state by the image light projected from the projection means, but also the movable projected member is simply operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection surface having different image visual effects depending on the game state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are configured to be different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual visual effect. Become.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides the 13-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13-2 game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for drawing lots based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and a plurality of gaming states (for example, general gaming states) having different advantages for the player. , A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls one of the notification game states) and a projection means (for example, a projector 213) that can project video light according to the result of the lottery. The movable projected member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as the projection area on which the image is projected and the movable projected member are operated by the image light projected from the projection means. The movable projected member driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and a gear shape portion 744) is provided, and the movable projected member is an image projected from the projection means. It has at least a first projection area and a second projection area as a projection area on which an image is projected by light, and the projection area can be changed by being operated by the movable projected member driving means. At the same time, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region on which the image is projected by the video light and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region on which the image is projected by the video light are The movable projected member driving means is configured in different shapes from each other, and the movable projected member driving means is said to be movable projected so that the image light projected from the projection means is projected on different projection regions according to the gaming state. The member can be operated, and one projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and another projection area adjacent to the one projection area (for example, the first projection area) among the plurality of projection areas are movable. It is characterized in that the movable projected member is operably configured so that forward rotation and reverse rotation are repeatedly performed between the projection surface 7141) of the screen member 714 of 2.

According to the game machine of the above (1), not only the projection area on which the image is projected is changed according to the game state by the image light projected from the projection means, but also the movable projected member is simply operated. With such a configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection surface having different image visual effects depending on the game state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are configured to be different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual visual effect. Become. Further, while the image light projected from the projection means projects the image onto different projection areas according to the game state, the forward rotation and the reverse rotation are repeated between one projection area and the other projection area. Since it is possible to perform this, it is possible to perform an effect of expecting which projection region the image light is projected on. For example, when the image light is projected on one projection area in a relatively advantageous gaming state and the image light is projected on another projection area in a relatively unfavorable gaming state, one projection area and another projection By repeatedly performing forward rotation and reverse rotation with the region, it is possible to preferably perform an effect with a high visual effect.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[14th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the game proceeds according to the result of the lottery. A projection means capable of projecting a predetermined image light (for example, a projector 213) and an image light control means capable of controlling an image projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, a sub-control board 72). ), The first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and the second projection area (for example, for example) as the projection area in which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. It has a movable projected member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having at least a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a fixed projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means. A fixed projected member (eg, lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708), a movable projected member driving means capable of operating the movable projected member (eg, drive mechanism 815, large diameter gear 742, and The image light control means can project a first image light according to the result of the lottery and a second image light irrelevant to the result of the lottery, including a gear shape portion 744). Yes, the image projected by the first image light (for example, an effect image) is projected on at least the projection area of the movable projected member, and the image projected by the second image light (for example, for example). The information image) is characterized in that it is configured to be projected onto at least a projection region of the fixed projection member.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the image projected by the first image light according to the result of the lottery is projected at least in the projection area of the movable projected member, and has nothing to do with the result of the lottery. Since the image projected by the two image lights is projected at least in the projection area of the fixed projected member, the image projected by the second image light is projected onto the projection area of the fixed projected member while being projected. The image projected by the first image light can be projected onto the projection area of the movable projected member, and it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a high image visual effect.

According to the 7th to 14th gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably perform an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

[15th-18th game machines]
Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known.

The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start.

The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do.

The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols.

By the way, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a liquid crystal display device in which an effect is performed according to the result of a lottery, and a light guide plate provided on the front side of a display area of the display device. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8744).

The liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8744 faces the front direction so that the display area where the effect is performed can be seen by the player, and a light guide plate is provided on the front side of this display area. However, in recent years, it has been required to produce a production with a higher visual effect.

In addition, although it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest by providing a light guide plate, since a corresponding area is required for the installation space, there is a risk that problems such as pressure on the installation space of other devices may occur. was there.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the interest by preferably performing an effect having a higher visual visual effect.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 15-1 game machine having the following configuration.

[15th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) that emits a predetermined light and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate is provided with a light input portion (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and the light received from the light input portion causes the image to be formed. It has a display surface portion (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) that appears, and the display surface portion is inclined with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and the light guide plate. It is characterized in that the light entering portion is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion while being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light emitting portion.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the display surface portion (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate is directed with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921). Since it is tilted and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, the image can be seen from a viewpoint different from the conventional one while saving the installation space. The visual effect can be further enhanced.

By the way, when the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate is arranged so as to be inclined to the left or / or right with respect to the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), the light emitting surface portion and the guiding surface portion are guided. A predetermined angle is generated between the light receiving portion of the light emitting plate (for example, the side surfaces 911A1, 911B3, 911C3 on the base end side), and there is a possibility that the light from the light emitting surface portion cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, by forming the light receiving portion of the light guide plate so as to face the light emitting surface portion, sufficient light can be received, and the visual visual effect is preferably enhanced.

It should be noted that "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal state (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface is not taken in). .. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, the image is indirectly or directly displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 15-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-2 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate) having a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) that emits a predetermined light and a display surface portion that displays an image by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate 911) is provided in a wall shape so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and the image appearing on the light guide plate can be reflected on the reflecting surface portion (for example, inside). The light guide plate includes face walls 914L and 914R), and the display surface portion of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion inside the reflecting surface portion in front view. At the same time, by being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, both the image appearing on the display surface portion and the reflected image obtained by reflecting the image on the reflecting surface portion can be obtained. It is characterized in that it is configured so that it can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine (1), the display surface portion of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of a predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921). Since it is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, the image can be seen from a viewpoint different from the conventional one while saving the installation space, and the visual visual effect can be further enhanced. Can be done.

Moreover, since both the image appearing on the display surface portion and the reflected image reflected on the reflecting surface portion (for example, the inner wall 914L, 914R) can be visually recognized, the effect of higher visual visual effect is obtained. Can be done.

It should be noted that "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal state (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface is not taken in). .. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, the image is indirectly or directly displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 15th-3rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15th-3rd game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) that emits a predetermined light and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) that displays an image by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate is provided with a light input portion (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and the light received from the light input portion causes the image to be formed. It has a display surface portion (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) and an injection portion (for example, side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side) for emitting light input from the light input portion. The display surface portion is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. The injection portion is characterized in that the injection portion is cut so that the angle formed between the display surface portion and the front surface side is a sharp angle.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the display surface portion of the light guide plate (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) is emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light. Since it is tilted and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate, the image can be seen from a viewpoint different from the conventional one while saving the installation space. The visual effect can be further enhanced.

Moreover, since the injection portion of the light guide plate (for example, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the anti-base end side) is cut so that the angle formed by the front surface of the display surface portion of the light guide plate is an acute angle. , The light emitted from the injection part can be made difficult to see from the player side, and the light emitted from the injection part is used to appeal to a third party about the state of the game machine. It becomes possible to do. In this way, it is possible to preferably further enhance the visual visual effect.

It should be noted that "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal state (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface is not taken in). .. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, the image is indirectly or directly displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 16-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[16-1 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) that emits a predetermined light and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, a second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light receiving portion (for example, a side surface 911A1 on the base end side and a side surface 911B1 on the base end side) and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears by the light input from the light entering portion. Each has an emitting portion (for example, a side surface 911A2 on the anti-base end side and a side surface 911B2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light entering portion, and the display surface portions face each other. These display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and are overlapped so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. Further, between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light input portion toward the injection portion is provided. It is characterized in that ribs (for example, ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, 9119A) are formed.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the first light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 911A) and the second light guide plate (for example, the second light guide plate 911B) have a display surface portion (for example) of each other. For example, while the flat surfaces 911A3) face each other, these display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), and are incorporated into the light guide plate. They are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the predetermined traveling direction of light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation) while saving the installation space, and it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

Moreover, between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, there are ribs (for example, ribs 9113A, 9115A) having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light entering portion toward the emitting portion. , 9117A, 9119A) are formed. Therefore, the distance between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is the largest on the light receiving portion side and gradually decreases toward the injection portion side. As a result, on the light receiving portion side, it is possible to suppress the light entering from the light sources that should enter the other light guide plates, and on the emitting portion side, the emitting portion and the second light guide plate of the first light guide plate are suppressed. Since the distance from the light source plate of the light guide plate is short, it is possible to emit thick light, and it is possible to enhance the appeal to a third party.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above is further provided with a third light guide plate (for example, a third light guide plate 911C) on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, and the third guide. The light plate includes a light receiving portion (for example, a side surface 911C1 on the proximal end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911C3) in which the image appears due to the light received from the light entering portion. The display surface portion has an injection portion (for example, a side surface 911C2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light entrance portion, and the display surface portion is a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface) of the second light guide plate. While facing the 911B3), it is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light incorporated in the light guide plate. They are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other, and further, between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate, there is an inclination that is downwardly inclined from the light input portion toward the injection portion. It is characterized in that ribs having a surface (for example, ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B) are formed.

According to the game machine of the above (2), also for the third light guide plate, the display surface portion (for example, flat surface 911C3) of the third light guide plate is the display surface portion (for example, flat surface 911B3) of the second light guide plate. ), While being inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and overlapping so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. Have been placed. Therefore, on the light receiving portion side, it is possible to suppress the incoming light from the light source that should enter the other light guide plate, and on the emitting portion side, the distance from the emitting portion of the other light guide plate becomes short. Therefore, it is possible to emit thicker light together with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and it is possible to further enhance the appeal to a third party. In addition, while saving the installation space, it is possible to visually recognize more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation), and it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

The phrase "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in (1) and (2) above means that the image appears in a normal state (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to the fact that it does not appear. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, the image is indirectly or directly displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 16-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[16-2 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) that emits a predetermined light and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, a second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light receiving portion (for example, a side surface 911A1 on the base end side and a side surface 911B1 on the base end side) and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears by the light received from the light entering portion. Each has an emitting portion (for example, a side surface 911A2 on the anti-base end side and a side surface 911B2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light receiving portion, and the display surface portions face each other. These display surface portions are arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion and substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the incorporated predetermined light. Further, a first light guide plate having a predetermined length between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is provided relatively on the light entry side. It is characterized in that a protrusion and a second protrusion shorter than the first protrusion and provided on the injection side are provided.

According to the game machine of the above (1), the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate are in a predetermined direction in which light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portions of the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate face each other. It is inclined with respect to the light, and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation) while saving the installation space, and it is possible to produce a highly visual effect. Here, "substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in" means that the display surface portion of the first light guide plate is relative to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the first light guide plate. It means that the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light incorporated in the second light guide plate.

Moreover, between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, a first protrusion having a predetermined length and a second protrusion shorter than the first protrusion are the first protrusions. It is provided on the injection side. Therefore, the distance between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is larger on the light receiving portion side than on the emitting side. As a result, on the light receiving portion side, it is possible to suppress the incoming light from the light sources that should enter the other light guide plates. On the other hand, on the injection portion side, since the distance between the injection portion of the first light guide plate and the injection portion of the second light guide plate is closer than that on the light inlet side, thick light can be emitted to a third party. It is possible to increase the appeal to the product.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above is further provided with a third light guide plate on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, and the third light guide plate receives the predetermined light. It has an incoming light portion, a display surface portion on which the image appears by the light received from the incoming light portion, and an emitting portion for emitting the light received from the incoming light portion, and the display surface portion is the first. While facing the display surface portion of No. 2, it is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially relative to the traveling direction of the predetermined light incorporated in the third light guide plate. They are arranged so as to be parallel to each other, and further have a predetermined length between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate, and are relatively forward. It is characterized in that a third protrusion provided on the entry light side and a fourth protrusion shorter than the third protrusion and provided on the injection side are provided.

According to the game machine of (2) above, also for the third light guide plate, the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portion of the third light guide plate faces the second display surface portion. In addition to being inclined with respect to the light, they are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the third light guide plate. Therefore, on the light receiving portion side, it is possible to suppress the incoming light from the light source that should enter the other light guide plate, and on the emitting portion side, the distance from the emitting portion of the other light guide plate becomes short. Therefore, it is possible to emit thicker light together with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and it is possible to further enhance the appeal to a third party. In addition, while saving the installation space, it is possible to visually recognize more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation), and it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

The phrase "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in (1) and (2) above means that the image appears in a normal state (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to the fact that it does not appear. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, the image is indirectly or directly displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 16th to 3rd gaming machines having the following configurations.

[No. 16-3 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) that emits a predetermined light and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, a second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light receiving portion (for example, a side surface 911A1 on the base end side and a side surface 911B1 on the base end side) and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears by the light received from the light entering portion. Each has an emitting portion (for example, a side surface 911A2 on the anti-base end side and a side surface 911B2 on the anti-base end side) that emits light input from the light receiving portion, and the display surface portions face each other. These display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and are overlapped so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. It is characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine of the above (1), the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate are in a predetermined direction of travel of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portions of the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate face each other. It is inclined with respect to the light guide plate, and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (deviation) while saving the installation space, and it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

The phrase "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in (1) and (2) above means that the image appears in a normal state (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to the fact that it does not appear. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, the image is indirectly or directly displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 17-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[17th game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is derived from a light emitting surface portion (for example, LED substrate 922) in which at least a first light source and a second light source are arranged, and the first light source and / or the second light source. A gaming machine having a light receiving portion (for example, a side surface 911C1 of a base end portion) that takes in at least the light of the above, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911C) that displays an image by taking in light from the light entering portion. The light input unit is a first protrusion (for example, a projecting body 956) that receives light from the first light source and a second light input unit that receives light from the second light source. The game machine has at least two protrusions (for example, another protrusion 956 adjacent to the protrusion 956), and the game machine has at least the first protrusion and the second protrusion. It is characterized by including a partition member (for example, a partition wall 937).

According to the game machine of (1) above, between the first protrusion (for example, a protruding body 956) and the second protrusion (for example, another protruding body 956 adjacent to the protruding body 956). Since it is possible to prevent light from being incident from each other, that is, to prevent other light sources from being incident in a mixed manner, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the light guide plate has a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911C3) on which the image appears due to the light received from the light input portion, or the first light source or /. The first projection and the first protrusion are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the second light source and substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken into the light guide plate. The protrusions 2 are characterized in that they are formed so as to face the first light source and the second light source, respectively.

When the display surface portion (for example, flat surface 911C3) of the light guide plate is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source as in the game machine of (2) above, the traveling direction and guidance of the light from the light source A predetermined angle is generated between the light source and the edge of the light plate, and the light from the light source may not sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, the first protrusion is formed so as to face the first light source, and the second protrusion is formed so as to face the second light source. As a result, the light emitted from the first light source is efficiently incident on the first protrusion, and the light emitted from the second light source is efficiently incident on the second protrusion. This makes it possible to preferably further enhance the visual visual effect.

It should be noted that the terms "an image appears by taking in light from the light entering part" described in (1) above and "an image appears by light entering light from the light entering part" described in (2) above. It is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear in the normal time (when the light is not taken in from the light input part). For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, taking in ambient light, and a clearer image appears when light is taken in from an incoming light portion. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also "image". It is called "image".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Further, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) or the light source. The traveling direction of the light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the light itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 17-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[17th-2 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of LED 921) that emits a predetermined light and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) in which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light. The light guide plate is provided with a light input portion (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) through which the predetermined light enters, and the light received from the light input portion is transmitted. The display surface portion has a display surface portion (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) on which the image appears, and the display surface portion is, at least in part, non-transmissive, which inhibits the transmission of light entering from the light entrance portion. It is characterized by having a sex region.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when a predetermined light enters from the light input portion of the light guide plate, the non-transmissive region is created in a three-dimensional and conspicuous manner by the light transmitting region around it. Therefore, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the light guide plate has a display surface portion that is inclined with respect to a predetermined traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting surface portion and is incorporated into the light guide plate. The light entering portion is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion while being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the display surface portion of the light guide plate is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of a predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, the light emitting surface portion and the light input portion of the light guide plate are arranged. A predetermined angle is generated between the two, and there is a possibility that the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, by forming the light input portion of the light guide plate so as to face the light emitting surface portion, the light from the light emitting surface portion can efficiently enter the light guide plate. This makes it possible to preferably further enhance the visual visual effect.

The phrase "an image appears by taking in a predetermined light" described in (1) above does not mean that an image appears in a normal state (when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to that. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and a clearer image appears when a predetermined light emitted from a light emitting surface portion is taken in. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, the image is indirectly or directly displayed by the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called "images".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" described in (1) and (2) above includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate. Therefore, the mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 18-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[18-1 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, LED substrate 922) in which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, lens 928A, which emit light by taking in light from the light source). A light emitting member having 928B, 928C) (for example, the right lens subsystem 912R) and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light source. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member conducts the light taken in from the light source to the light emitting unit. As a result, each of the plurality of light emitting units has a conductive portion (for example, light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C) having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the corresponding light emitting portion. It is a feature.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the plurality of light emitting parts are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so that the lengths from the light source to the light emitting part are different from each other, they are in combination with the image appearing on the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes in light from a light source arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the lengths from the light source to the light emitting portion are different, the emission intensity of the light in the light emitting portion varies. It may occur. Therefore, the light emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light emitting portions, assuming that the light taken in from the light source is conducted to the light emitting portion. ing. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting parts having different lengths from the light source to the light emitting part, the light emitting intensity in the light emitting part is substantially made uniform even though the light is taken in from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface part. It becomes possible to perform a production with a higher visual effect.

Note that "an image appears by taking in light from a light source" is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear in a normal time (when light is not taken in from a light source). For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, ambient light, and when light is taken in from a light source, a clearer image appears. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also "image". It is called "image".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Further, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) or the light source. The traveling direction of the light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the light itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

Further, in (1) above, the expressions for distance and dimensions are unified by "length", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the dimensions of the structure itself (for example, the light emitting part itself) are defined as "length". The length between objects may be defined as "distance".

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides the 18-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[18th-2 game machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of LED 921) in which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, a lens 928A) that emit light by taking in light from the light source. , 928B, 928C), and a light emitting member (for example, right lens subsystem 912R) and a light guide plate (for example, light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light source. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member conducts the light taken in from the light source to the light emitting unit. As a device, each of the plurality of light emitting units has a conductive portion (for example, light guide lenses 924A, 924B, 924C) having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the corresponding light emitting portion. The conductive portion is characterized in that it is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source and is formed so as to face the light source.

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the plurality of light emitting parts are arranged side by side behind the light guide plate so that the lengths from the light source to the light emitting part are different from each other, they are in combination with the image appearing on the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to produce a highly visual effect.

By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes in light from a light source arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the lengths from the light source to the light emitting portion are different, the emission intensity of the light in the light emitting portion varies. It may occur. Therefore, the light emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light emitting portions, assuming that the light taken in from the light source is conducted to the light emitting portion. ing. Further, since the conductive portion is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source, a predetermined angle is generated between the traveling direction of the light from the light source and the conductive portion, and the light from the light source is emitted. There is a risk that sufficient light cannot enter the conductive part. Therefore, by forming the conductive portion so as to face the light source arranged on the light emitting surface portion, the light from the light source can efficiently enter the conductive portion. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting units having different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit, the light emitting unit receives the light efficiently while taking in the light from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface portion. It is possible to make the light emission intensity substantially uniform, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

In addition, "an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light emitting member" means that the image does not appear in normal times (when light is not taken in from a light source different from the light emitting member). It is not limited. For example, even in a normal state, an image can be visually recognized by, for example, taking in ambient light, and a clearer image appears when light is taken in from a light source other than the light emitting member. In addition, although the image is normally invisible by composing the image with a transparent paint or a transparent member, it can be visually recognized by taking in a predetermined light.

Further, the "image" generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also "image". It is called "image".

Further, the "light emitting surface portion" includes, for example, a single LED. Further, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is arranged is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Further, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) or the light source. The traveling direction of the light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the light itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

According to the fifteenth to eighteenth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest by preferably performing a production having a higher visual visual effect.

71 Main control board 72 Sub control board 213 Projector 700 Movable screen unit 708 Fixed base 712 First screen member 714 Second screen member 716 Third screen member 722 Rotating shaft 732 Right base 742 Large diameter gear 744 Gear shape part 790 Stopper mechanism 791 Light-shielding piece 815 Drive mechanism 911 Light guide plate 912R Right lens subsystem 914L, 914R Inner surface wall 922 LED substrate 924A, 924B, 924C Light guide lens 928A, 928B, 928C Lens 937 Partition wall 956 Protruding body 7082 Demarcated ribs 7123,7141,7167 Projection surface 7144 Arm member 7145 Male rib 7164 Female rib 7326 Weight member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine provided with a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the game proceeds according to the result of the lottery.
A projection means capable of projecting a predetermined image light and
An image light control means capable of controlling an image projected by the image light projected from the projection means,
As a projection region in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, a movable projected member having at least a first projection region and a second projection region, and
A fixed projection member having a fixed projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and a fixed projection member.
A movable projected member driving means capable of operating the movable projected member, and
With
The video light control means
It is possible to project the first video light according to the result of the lottery and the second video light having nothing to do with the result of the lottery.
The image projected by the first image light is projected onto at least the projection area of the movable projected member, and the image projected by the second image light is at least possessed by the fixed projected member. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be projected onto a projection area.